1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
8 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
10 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
11 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
12 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
13 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
14 % the documentation team
15 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
17 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
18 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
20 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
21 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
23 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
25 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
26 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
28 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
29 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
30 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
31 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
33 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
37 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
38 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
40 % for customized page headers/footers
41 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
43 % change header rule width
44 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
46 % used to have extra space in table cells
47 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
48 {\usepackage{array}}{}
49 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
51 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
52 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
53 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
55 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
57 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
58 \use_default_options false
63 \maintain_unincluded_children false
65 \language_package default
70 \font_typewriter default
72 \font_default_family default
73 \use_non_tex_fonts false
79 \default_output_format default
81 \bibtex_command bibtex
82 \index_command default
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 0
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 0
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 0
110 \use_package stmaryrd 0
111 \use_package undertilde 0
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
121 \notefontcolor #0000ff
138 \paragraph_separation indent
139 \paragraph_indentation default
140 \quotes_language english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes true
145 \output_changes false
149 \author -1966299584 "ef"
150 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
151 \author 2089657418 "Usti"
162 by the \SpecialChar LyX
167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
169 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
170 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
171 Documentation mailing list:
172 \begin_inset CommandInset href
174 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
185 \begin_inset Newline newline
189 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 \begin_inset Note Note
196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
197 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
198 \begin_inset Newline newline
203 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
204 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
212 \begin_layout Standard
213 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
214 LatexCommand tableofcontents
221 \begin_layout Chapter
225 \begin_layout Section
226 What is \SpecialChar LyX
230 \begin_layout Standard
232 is a document preparation system.
233 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
234 scripts, publishable books, business
235 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
236 It is unlike most other
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
244 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
246 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
262 pt type, left justified, 5
263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
272 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
276 \begin_layout Standard
277 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
282 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
286 \begin_layout Standard
291 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
292 's philosophy: most importantly,
293 the format of all of the manuals.
294 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
295 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
301 manual describes that, too.
304 \begin_layout Section
309 \begin_layout Standard
310 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
311 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
313 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
314 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
318 \begin_layout Standard
319 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
320 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
321 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
323 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
324 only a vertical scrollbar.
325 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
326 The first case is large images.
327 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
328 image and use the option
339 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
342 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
343 this doesn't work for equations yet.
346 \begin_layout Standard
347 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
348 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
356 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
363 \begin_layout Section
367 \begin_layout Standard
368 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
370 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
372 Just select the manual you want to read from the
379 \begin_layout Section
380 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
384 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
391 \begin_layout Standard
392 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
393 can be configured via the menu
395 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
399 \begin_inset Index idx
402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
409 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
411 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
412 packages are available.
413 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
415 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
417 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
422 \begin_inset space \space{}
425 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
426 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
428 To force \SpecialChar LyX
429 to re-inspect your system, you should use
431 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
435 \begin_inset Index idx
438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
439 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
445 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
446 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
449 \begin_layout Section
452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
454 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
461 \begin_layout Standard
462 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
463 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
464 installed, but you will not be
465 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
466 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
467 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
468 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
469 document can always be output as plain text
473 \begin_layout Standard
474 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
475 or DocBook classes or packages.
476 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
477 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
480 \begin_layout Standard
481 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
482 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
483 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
486 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
505 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
506 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
509 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
513 \begin_inset Note Note
516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
517 The two braces in the \SpecialChar TeX
518 Code box prevent that the term
519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
527 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
528 More about \SpecialChar TeX
529 Code is described in section
534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
536 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
540 , the printout of proper names like \SpecialChar LaTeX
541 is explained in section
546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
548 reference "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
558 \begin_inset Index idx
561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
562 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
568 See section 5.1 of the
572 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
576 \begin_layout Chapter
577 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
581 \begin_layout Section
582 Basic File Operations
583 \begin_inset Index idx
586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
595 \begin_layout Standard
600 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
601 in addition to some more advanced operations:
604 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
642 arg "buffer-new-template"
648 \begin_layout Itemize
670 \begin_layout Itemize
680 \begin_layout Itemize
694 \begin_layout Itemize
716 \begin_layout Itemize
728 arg "buffer-write-as"
734 \begin_layout Itemize
748 \begin_layout Itemize
762 \begin_layout Standard
763 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
764 a few minor differences.
767 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
778 command lists the available templates.
779 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
780 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
781 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
789 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
796 \begin_layout Standard
797 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
829 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
830 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
831 is just that — a big, blank space.
839 \begin_layout Standard
860 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
865 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
868 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
886 will reload the document from disk.
887 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
888 and want to restore it to the last save.
897 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
898 them as your changes.
901 \begin_layout Section
902 Basic Editing Features
903 \begin_inset Index idx
906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
915 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
922 \begin_layout Standard
923 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
924 can perform cut and paste operations
925 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
926 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
927 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
928 editing features and how to access
930 We will start with cut and paste.
933 \begin_layout Standard
934 As you might expect, the
938 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
939 various other editing features.
940 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
944 \begin_layout Itemize
950 \begin_inset Index idx
953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
982 \begin_layout Itemize
988 \begin_inset Index idx
991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1020 \begin_layout Itemize
1026 \begin_inset Index idx
1029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1054 \begin_layout Itemize
1058 \begin_inset space ~
1064 \begin_layout Itemize
1068 \begin_inset space ~
1074 \begin_layout Itemize
1078 \begin_inset space ~
1082 \begin_inset space ~
1088 \begin_inset Index idx
1091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1100 \begin_inset Index idx
1103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1118 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1128 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1134 \begin_layout Standard
1135 The first three are self-explanatory.
1136 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1137 and other programs by
1158 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1159 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1164 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1165 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1166 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1167 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1168 into individual cells.
1172 \begin_inset space ~
1177 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1178 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1182 \begin_layout Standard
1186 \begin_inset space ~
1191 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1193 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1195 \begin_inset space ~
1202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1208 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1209 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1210 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1216 \begin_inset space \space{}
1219 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1220 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1226 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1228 \begin_inset space ~
1232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1236 \begin_inset space ~
1245 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1246 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1248 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1257 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1258 start a new paragraph.
1259 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1260 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1265 \begin_inset space ~
1268 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1274 \begin_inset space ~
1282 \begin_inset space ~
1285 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1288 paste from the primary selection.
1289 This is normally the currently selected text.
1292 \begin_layout Standard
1295 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1301 \begin_inset space ~
1309 \begin_inset space ~
1313 \begin_inset space ~
1319 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1325 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1328 \begin_inset space ~
1337 \begin_inset space ~
1342 button to skip the current word.
1346 \begin_inset space ~
1351 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1355 \begin_inset space ~
1360 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1362 If the toggle is set, searching for
1363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1374 will not match the word
1375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1389 Match whole words only
1391 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1392 to only find complete words, e.
1393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1422 offers also an advanced
1425 \begin_inset space ~
1429 \begin_inset space ~
1434 feature that is described in sec.
1435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1441 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1448 \begin_layout Standard
1449 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1450 \begin_inset space \space{}
1454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1462 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1464 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1469 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1476 \begin_layout Standard
1480 arg "inset-select-all"
1483 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1484 When the cursor is inside an inset
1487 arg "inset-select-all"
1490 selects the content of the inset.
1494 arg "inset-select-all"
1497 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1502 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1505 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1509 \begin_layout Section
1511 \begin_inset Index idx
1514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1521 \begin_inset Index idx
1524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1533 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1540 \begin_layout Standard
1541 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1543 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1546 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1549 or the toolbar button
1555 to undo some mistake.
1556 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1558 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1561 or the toolbar button
1568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1575 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1576 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1579 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1582 \begin_layout Standard
1583 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1592 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1593 This is a consequence of the 100
1594 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1597 step undo limit mentioned above.
1600 \begin_layout Standard
1609 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1611 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1615 \begin_layout Section
1617 \begin_inset Index idx
1620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1629 \begin_layout Standard
1630 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1633 \begin_layout Enumerate
1635 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
1642 \begin_layout Itemize
1647 once anywhere in the edit window.
1648 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1652 \begin_layout Enumerate
1654 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
1661 \begin_layout Itemize
1668 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1671 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1674 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1675 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1678 \begin_layout Itemize
1679 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1682 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1689 \begin_layout Enumerate
1690 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1691 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
1698 \begin_layout Standard
1699 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1700 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1704 \begin_layout Section
1706 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1708 name "sec:Navigating"
1713 \begin_inset Index idx
1716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1725 \begin_layout Standard
1727 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1730 \begin_layout Itemize
1735 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1736 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1739 \begin_layout Itemize
1740 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1742 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1744 \begin_inset space ~
1749 or by the toolbar button
1752 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1758 \begin_layout Itemize
1759 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1761 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1764 and use the same menu to return to them.
1765 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1768 \begin_layout Standard
1772 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1777 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1778 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1780 \begin_inset space ~
1785 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1786 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1787 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1788 your last editing position.
1791 \begin_layout Standard
1796 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1800 \begin_layout Subsection
1802 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1804 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1811 \begin_layout Standard
1812 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1813 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1814 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1816 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1822 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1826 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1833 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1838 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1842 \begin_layout Standard
1843 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1844 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1845 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1846 dialog and to modify the citation.
1849 \begin_layout Standard
1850 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1852 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1853 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1861 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1864 \begin_layout Standard
1865 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1866 you further to control the display.
1871 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1872 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1878 option keeps it in the current view state.
1879 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1880 \begin_inset space ~
1883 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1884 \begin_inset space ~
1887 3, the subsections of sections
1888 \begin_inset space ~
1891 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1896 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1901 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1911 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1914 \begin_layout Standard
1921 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1922 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1936 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1937 So, for example, you can move section
1938 \begin_inset space ~
1942 \begin_inset space ~
1945 2.4 or after section
1946 \begin_inset space ~
1951 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1964 (or the corresponding key bindings
1972 ) you can change the level of sections.
1973 So you can for example make section
1974 \begin_inset space ~
1978 \begin_inset space ~
1982 \begin_inset space ~
1988 \begin_layout Section
1989 Input/Word Completion
1990 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1992 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1997 \begin_inset Index idx
2000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2007 \begin_inset Index idx
2010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2041 \begin_layout Standard
2043 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2045 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2046 is used to propose completions.
2049 \begin_layout Standard
2050 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2053 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2058 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2065 \begin_inset space ~
2069 \begin_inset space ~
2074 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2078 \begin_inset space ~
2083 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2084 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2088 \begin_inset space ~
2094 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2095 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2096 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2097 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2100 \begin_layout Standard
2102 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2103 completions available.
2108 key to accept a proposed completion.
2109 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2110 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2111 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2118 \begin_layout Standard
2119 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2120 ing options for text.
2121 The special math option
2125 enables characters to be composed.
2126 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2127 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2130 , you can then input the characters
2131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2142 to a formula to get it.
2143 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2144 of the math toolbar.
2145 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2149 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2150 's installation folder.
2151 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2160 \begin_layout Section
2162 \begin_inset Index idx
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2172 \begin_inset Index idx
2175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2204 \begin_inset Index idx
2207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2239 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2253 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2256 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2260 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2267 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2274 \begin_layout Standard
2278 \begin_inset space ~
2286 \begin_inset space ~
2307 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2311 \begin_layout Labeling
2312 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2316 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2317 LatexCommand nomenclature
2319 description "Tabulator key"
2325 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2327 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2328 \begin_inset space ~
2332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2334 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2341 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2345 , especially section
2346 \begin_inset space ~
2350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2352 reference "subsec:Lists"
2358 If you are still confused, look in the
2363 \begin_inset Newline newline
2371 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2372 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2376 \begin_layout Labeling
2377 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2381 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2382 LatexCommand nomenclature
2384 description "Escape key"
2391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2398 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2399 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2402 \begin_layout Labeling
2403 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2409 \begin_inset space ~
2413 \begin_inset space ~
2420 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2421 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2425 \begin_layout Standard
2426 There are three modifier keys:
2429 \begin_layout Labeling
2430 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2448 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2449 LatexCommand nomenclature
2451 description "Control key"
2455 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2456 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2457 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
2464 \begin_layout Itemize
2473 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2476 \begin_layout Itemize
2485 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2488 \begin_layout Itemize
2497 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2501 \begin_layout Labeling
2502 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2520 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2521 LatexCommand nomenclature
2523 description "Shift key"
2527 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2528 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2531 \begin_layout Labeling
2532 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2550 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2551 LatexCommand nomenclature
2553 description "Alt or Meta key"
2557 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2558 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2559 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2565 \begin_inset Newline newline
2568 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2570 menu accelerator keys
2573 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2574 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2575 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
2582 \begin_layout Standard
2583 For example, the sequence
2584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2590 \begin_inset space ~
2594 \begin_inset space ~
2600 \begin_inset space ~
2608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2627 \begin_inset space ~
2633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2643 \begin_layout Standard
2648 manual lists all other things bound to the
2656 \begin_layout Standard
2657 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2659 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2660 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2661 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2662 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2663 The \SpecialChar LyX
2664 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2665 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2666 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2668 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2684 followed by a capital
2691 \begin_layout Chapter
2694 \begin_inset Index idx
2697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2707 \begin_layout Section
2709 \begin_inset Index idx
2712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2721 \begin_layout Subsection
2725 \begin_layout Standard
2726 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2727 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2728 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2729 numbering schemes, and so on.
2730 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2731 and format the title of your document differently.
2734 \begin_layout Standard
2739 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2740 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2741 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2742 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2743 picks one for you by default.
2744 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2747 \begin_layout Subsection
2749 \begin_inset Index idx
2752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2761 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2768 \begin_layout Standard
2769 You can select a class using the
2771 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2772 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2776 \begin_inset Index idx
2779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2786 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2790 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2794 \begin_layout Standard
2795 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2800 \begin_layout Description
2801 Article for basic articles
2804 \begin_layout Description
2805 Report for basic reports
2808 \begin_layout Description
2809 Book for writing a book
2812 \begin_layout Description
2813 Letter for US-style letters
2816 \begin_layout Standard
2817 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2818 only uses if you have installed
2819 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2820 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2821 distributions will include
2823 Here are some of the classes.
2824 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2826 Special Document Classes
2835 \begin_layout Description
2836 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2839 \begin_layout Description
2840 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2844 \begin_layout Description
2845 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2849 \begin_layout Description
2850 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2851 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2852 There are three article layouts available.
2853 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2854 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2855 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2856 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2861 sequential numbering
2862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2865 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2866 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2867 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2868 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2871 \begin_layout Description
2872 Beamer Layout for presentations
2875 \begin_layout Description
2876 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2877 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2878 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2879 with \SpecialChar LyX
2883 \begin_layout Description
2884 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2887 \begin_layout Description
2889 \begin_inset space ~
2892 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2895 \begin_layout Description
2896 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2899 \begin_layout Description
2900 Foils Used to make transparencies
2903 \begin_layout Description
2904 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2905 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2906 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2907 with \SpecialChar LyX
2911 \begin_layout Description
2912 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2913 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2916 \begin_layout Description
2917 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2920 \begin_layout Description
2921 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2924 \begin_layout Description
2925 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2926 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2927 (Is used by this document.)
2930 \begin_layout Description
2931 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2934 \begin_layout Description
2935 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2938 \begin_layout Description
2943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2950 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2951 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2953 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
2957 \begin_layout Description
2958 Slides Used to make transparencies
2961 \begin_layout Description
2963 \begin_inset space ~
2966 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2967 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2974 \begin_layout Standard
2975 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2977 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2983 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2984 of the document classes.
2987 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2991 \begin_layout Standard
2992 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2994 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2995 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2997 \begin_inset Index idx
3000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3017 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3018 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3020 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3023 \begin_layout Standard
3026 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3031 , are highly specialized.
3033 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3034 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3035 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3036 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3037 by some document class.
3038 There are just too many of them.
3039 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3042 \begin_layout Standard
3043 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3051 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3052 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3053 document class for a new file.
3055 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3060 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3069 manual for information on how to install them.
3070 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3076 \begin_layout Standard
3077 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3078 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3079 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3080 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3081 class files to be used for dissertation
3082 s submitted to those universities.
3083 The \SpecialChar LyX
3084 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3086 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3090 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3096 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3099 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3103 name "subsec:Modules"
3108 \begin_inset Index idx
3111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3120 \begin_layout Standard
3121 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3122 chosen document class.
3123 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3124 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3131 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3135 \begin_inset Index idx
3138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3145 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3149 \begin_layout Standard
3150 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3151 packages or file format converters that are not always
3152 installed by default.
3154 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3155 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3156 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3157 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3159 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3160 file without the missing prerequisites.
3161 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3162 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3165 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3169 \begin_inset Index idx
3172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3173 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3183 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3192 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3195 \begin_layout Standard
3196 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3204 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3206 will advise you about these things.
3214 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3216 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3218 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3223 \begin_inset Index idx
3226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3227 Document ! Local Layout
3235 \begin_layout Standard
3236 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3237 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3238 : They are intended to be used in
3239 a variety of different documents.
3240 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3241 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3242 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3243 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3244 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3246 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3264 manual for information on how to use it.
3267 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3271 \begin_layout Standard
3272 Each class has a default set of options.
3273 Here's a quick table describing them:
3276 \begin_layout Standard
3277 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3283 \begin_layout Standard
3285 \begin_inset Tabular
3286 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3287 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3288 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3289 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3290 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3291 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3292 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3746 \begin_layout Standard
3747 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3753 \begin_layout Standard
3754 You're probably also wondering what
3755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3759 \begin_inset space ~
3763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3767 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3768 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3773 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3778 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3788 headings, there are also
3796 headings, and so on.
3797 We will describe these headings fully in section
3798 \begin_inset space ~
3802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3804 reference "subsec:Headings"
3811 \begin_layout Subsection
3813 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3815 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3820 \begin_inset Index idx
3823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3830 \begin_inset Index idx
3833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3842 \begin_layout Standard
3843 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3845 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3852 \begin_inset space ~
3860 \begin_inset space ~
3865 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3867 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3868 doesn't support special options you want to
3869 use for your document.
3870 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3871 -class and its options, you have to read
3875 \begin_layout Standard
3879 \begin_inset space ~
3886 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3892 \begin_inset space ~
3897 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3898 You can choose between the following five options:
3901 \begin_layout Labeling
3902 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3907 Use default page style of current class.
3910 \begin_layout Labeling
3911 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3916 No page numbers or headings.
3919 \begin_layout Labeling
3920 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3928 \begin_layout Labeling
3929 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3934 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3935 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
3936 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
3937 maximum sectioning level of the class.
3940 \begin_layout Labeling
3941 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3946 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3947 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3953 \begin_inset Index idx
3956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3958 -packages ! fancyhdr
3964 How they are defined is explained in section
3965 \begin_inset space ~
3969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3971 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3978 \begin_layout Standard
3979 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3980 \begin_inset space ~
3984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3986 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3993 \begin_layout Subsection
3994 Paper Size and Orientation
3995 \begin_inset Index idx
3998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3999 Document ! Paper size
4005 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4007 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4014 \begin_layout Standard
4015 You can find the following options in the menu
4018 \begin_inset space ~
4025 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4029 \begin_inset Index idx
4032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4041 \begin_layout Labeling
4042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4046 \begin_inset space ~
4051 What size paper to print on.
4053 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
4060 \begin_layout Itemize
4066 \begin_layout Itemize
4072 \begin_layout Itemize
4078 \begin_layout Itemize
4084 \begin_layout Itemize
4087 US letter, US legal, US executive
4090 \begin_layout Itemize
4096 \begin_layout Itemize
4103 \begin_layout Labeling
4104 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4109 To choose whether to output as
4120 \begin_layout Labeling
4121 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4125 \begin_inset space ~
4130 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4131 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4134 \begin_layout Subsection
4136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4138 name "subsec:Margins"
4143 \begin_inset Index idx
4146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4153 \begin_inset Index idx
4156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4165 \begin_layout Standard
4166 Paper margins are set in the menu
4168 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4172 \begin_inset Index idx
4175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4184 \begin_layout Standard
4185 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4186 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4187 the paper format and the font size into account.
4190 \begin_layout Subsection
4194 \begin_layout Standard
4195 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4201 That includes the paragraph environments.
4202 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4203 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4204 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4206 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4215 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4217 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4218 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4219 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4222 \begin_layout Section
4223 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4224 \begin_inset Index idx
4227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4228 Paragraph ! Indentation
4236 \begin_layout Subsection
4238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4240 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4247 \begin_layout Standard
4248 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4249 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4252 \begin_layout Standard
4253 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4254 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4255 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4256 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4260 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4266 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4267 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4268 language than English.
4270 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4273 \begin_layout Standard
4274 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4275 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4276 into \SpecialChar LyX
4278 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4281 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4283 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4284 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4285 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4292 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4293 goes to produce a printable file.
4298 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4300 gives you the ability globally to change
4304 these pre-coded spacings.
4305 We will explain more later.
4308 \begin_layout Subsection
4309 Paragraph Separation
4310 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4312 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4317 \begin_inset Index idx
4320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4321 Paragraph ! Separation
4329 \begin_layout Standard
4337 \begin_inset space ~
4345 \begin_inset space ~
4352 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4356 \begin_inset Index idx
4359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4365 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4368 \begin_layout Subsection
4372 \begin_layout Standard
4373 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4376 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4378 \begin_inset space ~
4383 dialog and toggle the
4386 \begin_inset space ~
4391 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4394 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4398 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4399 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4403 \begin_layout Standard
4404 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4405 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4408 \begin_layout Subsection
4410 \begin_inset Index idx
4413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4422 \begin_layout Standard
4425 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4429 \begin_inset Index idx
4432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4441 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4445 \begin_inset space ~
4454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4455 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4461 \begin_inset Index idx
4464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4466 -packages ! setspace
4471 installed to use this feature.
4476 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4478 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4480 \begin_inset space ~
4485 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4486 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4489 \begin_layout Section
4490 Paragraph Environments
4491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4493 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4498 \begin_inset Index idx
4501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4502 Paragraph ! Environments
4508 \begin_inset Index idx
4511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4512 Paragraph environments|(
4520 \begin_layout Subsection
4524 \begin_layout Standard
4525 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4528 \begin_layout Standard
4547 \begin_inset Newline newline
4550 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4552 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4553 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4554 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4563 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4566 \begin_layout Standard
4567 A paragraph environment is simply a
4568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4575 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4576 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4577 scheme, labels, and so on.
4578 Additionally, you can
4579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4586 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4587 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4588 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4589 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4591 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4593 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4596 \begin_layout Standard
4597 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4598 \begin_inset Graphics
4599 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4605 at the left end of the toolbar.
4607 will change the environment of the
4611 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4612 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4613 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4617 \begin_layout Standard
4626 create a new paragraph using the
4630 paragraph environment.
4632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4639 because if you are in one of these environments:
4642 \begin_layout Itemize
4648 \begin_layout Itemize
4654 \begin_layout Itemize
4660 \begin_layout Itemize
4666 \begin_layout Itemize
4672 \begin_layout Itemize
4678 \begin_layout Itemize
4684 \begin_layout Standard
4686 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4690 , rather than resetting it to
4695 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4696 \begin_inset space ~
4700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4702 reference "sec:Nesting"
4709 \begin_layout Subsection
4713 \begin_layout Standard
4714 The default paragraph environment is
4719 It creates a plain paragraph.
4721 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4722 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4723 this manual) are in the
4730 \begin_layout Standard
4731 You can nest a paragraph using the
4735 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4743 \begin_layout Subsection
4745 \begin_inset Index idx
4748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4757 \begin_layout Standard
4758 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4759 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4768 for thanks or contact information.
4769 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4770 places all of this on a separate page
4771 along with today's date.
4772 For other types of documents, the title
4773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4780 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4784 \begin_layout Standard
4786 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4800 Here's how you use them:
4803 \begin_layout Itemize
4804 Put the title of your document in the
4811 \begin_layout Itemize
4812 Put the author name in the
4819 \begin_layout Itemize
4820 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4821 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4827 Note that using this environment is optional.
4828 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4829 will automatically insert today's date.
4830 If you don't want a date, use the option
4832 Suppress default date on front page
4836 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4837 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4839 \begin_inset space ~
4847 \begin_layout Standard
4848 You can use footnotes to insert
4849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4856 or contact information.
4859 \begin_layout Subsection
4861 \begin_inset Index idx
4864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4871 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4873 name "subsec:Headings"
4880 \begin_layout Standard
4881 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4883 takes care of the numbering for you.
4886 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4888 \begin_inset Index idx
4891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4892 Section headings ! Numbered
4900 \begin_layout Standard
4901 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4905 \begin_layout Enumerate
4911 \begin_layout Enumerate
4917 \begin_layout Enumerate
4923 \begin_layout Enumerate
4929 \begin_layout Enumerate
4935 \begin_layout Enumerate
4941 \begin_layout Enumerate
4947 \begin_layout Standard
4949 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4950 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4951 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4954 \begin_layout Standard
4955 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4956 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4957 You group the book into chapters.
4959 does a similar grouping:
4962 \begin_layout Itemize
4967 is divided into either
4978 \begin_layout Itemize
4990 \begin_layout Itemize
5002 \begin_layout Itemize
5014 \begin_layout Itemize
5026 \begin_layout Itemize
5038 \begin_layout Standard
5039 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5047 Not all document types use the
5051 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5056 is the top-level heading.
5064 \begin_layout Standard
5069 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5070 labels it with its number,
5071 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5073 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5085 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5087 \begin_inset Index idx
5090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5091 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5099 \begin_layout Standard
5100 The unnumbered section headings have a
5101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5108 at the end of their name.
5109 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5110 the table of contents, see section
5111 \begin_inset space ~
5115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5124 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5125 Changing the Numbering
5126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5128 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5135 \begin_layout Standard
5136 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5137 in the Table of Contents.
5138 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5140 Just as certain classes start with
5154 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5164 This is something you can change.
5167 \begin_layout Standard
5170 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5174 \begin_inset Index idx
5177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5186 \begin_inset space ~
5190 \begin_inset space ~
5195 you will see two counters.
5200 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5201 numbers a section heading.
5202 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5206 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5207 Short Titles of Headings
5208 \begin_inset Index idx
5211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5212 Section headings ! Short titles
5218 \begin_inset Argument 1
5221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5230 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5237 \begin_layout Standard
5238 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5239 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5240 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5241 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5244 \begin_layout Standard
5246 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5247 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5248 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5249 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5252 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5254 \begin_inset space ~
5260 This will insert a box labeled
5261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5265 \begin_inset space ~
5269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5272 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5273 This also works for captions inside floats.
5274 There can only be one short title per title.
5277 \begin_layout Standard
5278 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5281 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5285 \begin_layout Standard
5286 The following information applies to all section headings:
5289 \begin_layout Itemize
5290 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5293 \begin_layout Itemize
5294 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5297 \begin_layout Itemize
5298 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5301 \begin_layout Itemize
5302 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5305 \begin_layout Subsection
5309 \begin_layout Standard
5311 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5325 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5326 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5327 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5328 the text they contain.
5329 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5337 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5340 \begin_layout Standard
5341 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5350 when you start a new paragraph.
5351 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5355 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5356 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5357 have to change back to the
5361 environment yourself.
5364 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5373 \begin_inset Index idx
5376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5385 \begin_layout Standard
5386 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5387 time for the differences.
5396 are identical except for one difference:
5400 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5409 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5412 \begin_layout Standard
5413 Here's an example of the
5426 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5428 See – no indentation!
5432 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5433 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5434 the other paragraph.
5437 \begin_layout Standard
5438 Here's another example, this time in the
5445 \begin_layout Quotation
5451 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5452 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5453 the first line, then
5457 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5461 you were quoting other text.
5464 \begin_layout Quotation
5465 Here's a new paragraph.
5466 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5467 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5470 \begin_layout Standard
5471 As the examples show,
5475 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5476 They should put quotes in the
5481 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5485 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5488 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5490 \begin_inset Index idx
5493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5500 \begin_inset Index idx
5503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5519 \begin_layout Standard
5524 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5530 \begin_inset Newline newline
5533 Which I did not rehearse!
5537 It could be much worse.
5538 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5540 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5541 indented a bit more than the first.
5542 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5548 \begin_inset Newline newline
5551 And make things look fine
5552 \begin_inset Newline newline
5558 arg "newline-insert newline"
5564 \begin_layout Standard
5569 does not indent both margins.
5570 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5571 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5574 arg "newline-insert newline"
5580 \begin_layout Subsection
5582 \begin_inset Index idx
5585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5592 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5601 \begin_layout Standard
5603 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5613 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5614 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5623 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5624 lets you provide your own label.
5625 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5626 describing some general features of all four of them.
5629 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5633 \begin_layout Standard
5634 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5636 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5637 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5646 reset the environment to
5650 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5651 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5652 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5656 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5660 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5667 \begin_layout Standard
5668 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5669 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5670 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5672 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5673 you read all of section
5674 \begin_inset space ~
5678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5680 reference "sec:Nesting"
5687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5689 \begin_inset Index idx
5692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5699 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5708 \begin_layout Standard
5709 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5713 paragraph environment.
5714 It has the following properties:
5717 \begin_layout Itemize
5718 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5719 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5726 \begin_layout Itemize
5728 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5731 \begin_layout Itemize
5732 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5736 \begin_layout Itemize
5737 The items can have any length.
5739 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5740 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5747 \begin_layout Itemize
5752 environment inside another
5756 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5757 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5764 \begin_layout Itemize
5765 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5768 \begin_layout Itemize
5770 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5773 \begin_layout Itemize
5775 \begin_inset space ~
5779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5781 reference "sec:Nesting"
5785 for a full explanation of nesting.
5789 \begin_layout Standard
5790 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5799 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5802 \begin_layout Standard
5803 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5804 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5807 \begin_layout Itemize
5808 The label for the first level
5812 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5813 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5820 \begin_layout Itemize
5821 The label for the second level is a dash.
5822 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5829 \begin_layout Itemize
5830 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5831 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5838 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5843 \begin_layout Itemize
5844 Back out to the third level.
5848 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 Back to the second level.
5853 \begin_layout Itemize
5854 Back to the outermost level.
5857 \begin_layout Standard
5858 These are the default labels for an
5863 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5865 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5868 dialog in the submenu
5873 \begin_inset Index idx
5876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5882 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5886 \begin_layout Standard
5887 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5888 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5890 \begin_inset space ~
5894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5896 reference "sec:Nesting"
5903 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5905 \begin_inset Index idx
5908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5917 name "sec:Enumerate"
5924 \begin_layout Standard
5929 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5930 It has these properties:
5933 \begin_layout Enumerate
5934 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5935 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5942 \begin_layout Enumerate
5943 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5947 \begin_layout Enumerate
5949 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5952 \begin_layout Enumerate
5957 environment resets the counter to one.
5960 \begin_layout Enumerate
5970 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
5977 \begin_layout Enumerate
5978 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5979 Items can have any length.
5982 \begin_layout Enumerate
5983 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5986 \begin_layout Enumerate
5987 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5990 \begin_layout Enumerate
5991 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5995 \begin_layout Standard
6004 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6006 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6007 labels the four different levels in an
6014 \begin_layout Enumerate
6015 The first level of an
6019 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6020 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6027 \begin_layout Enumerate
6028 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6029 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6036 \begin_layout Enumerate
6037 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6038 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6045 \begin_layout Enumerate
6046 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6049 \begin_layout Enumerate
6050 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6055 \begin_layout Enumerate
6056 Back to the third level
6060 \begin_layout Enumerate
6061 Back to the second level.
6065 \begin_layout Enumerate
6066 Back to the outermost level.
6069 \begin_layout Standard
6070 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6074 environment, see section
6075 \begin_inset space ~
6079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6081 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6086 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6090 \begin_layout Standard
6091 There is more to nesting
6095 environments than we've stated here.
6096 You should read section
6097 \begin_inset space ~
6101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6103 reference "sec:Nesting"
6107 to learn more about nesting.
6110 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6112 \begin_inset Index idx
6115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6124 \begin_layout Standard
6125 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6129 list has no fixed label.
6130 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6139 of the first line as the label.
6143 \begin_layout Description
6144 Example: This is an example of the
6151 \begin_layout Standard
6153 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6157 \begin_layout Standard
6159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6166 it is meant that the first usage of the
6170 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6172 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6180 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6185 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6186 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6188 \begin_inset space ~
6194 \begin_inset space ~
6198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6200 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6204 for more information.) Here is an example:
6207 \begin_layout Description
6209 \begin_inset space ~
6212 Example: This one shows how to use a
6215 \begin_inset space ~
6227 \begin_layout Description
6228 Usage: You should use the
6232 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6233 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6235 It's not a good idea to use a
6239 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6240 You're better off using
6252 paragraphs into them.
6255 \begin_layout Description
6256 Nesting: You can nest
6260 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6264 \begin_layout Standard
6265 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6266 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6267 them from the first line.
6270 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6272 \begin_inset Index idx
6275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6284 \begin_layout Standard
6289 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6290 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6294 \begin_layout Standard
6303 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6305 Here are its properties:
6308 \begin_layout Labeling
6309 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6311 \begin_inset space ~
6314 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6323 of each line as the item label.
6328 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6329 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6330 space as described above.
6333 \begin_layout Labeling
6334 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6335 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6336 uses different margins for the item label and the
6337 body of the item text.
6338 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6339 label width plus a little extra space.
6343 \begin_layout Labeling
6344 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6346 \begin_inset space ~
6349 width \SpecialChar LyX
6350 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6351 If the label width is larger, the label
6352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6359 into the first line.
6360 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6361 margin of the rest of the item text.
6364 \begin_layout Labeling
6365 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6367 \begin_inset space ~
6370 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6375 environment has the same left margin.
6376 \begin_inset Newline newline
6379 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6382 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6384 \begin_inset space ~
6389 dialog (toolbar button
6392 arg "layout-paragraph"
6399 \begin_inset space ~
6404 determines the default label width.
6405 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6414 multiple times instead.
6415 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6425 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6428 \begin_inset space ~
6433 every time you alter a label in a
6438 \begin_inset Newline newline
6441 The predefined default width is the length of
6442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6450 \begin_inset space ~
6456 \begin_layout Standard
6461 list the same way as the
6465 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6471 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6475 \begin_layout Standard
6480 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6481 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6483 \begin_inset space ~
6487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6489 reference "sec:Nesting"
6493 to learn about nesting.
6496 \begin_layout Standard
6497 There is yet another feature of the
6501 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6502 left-justifies the item labels by
6504 You can use additional
6508 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6509 justifies the item label.
6514 are documented in section
6515 \begin_inset space ~
6519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6521 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6526 Here are some examples:
6529 \begin_layout Labeling
6530 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6531 Left The default for
6538 \begin_layout Labeling
6539 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6540 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6547 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6550 \begin_layout Labeling
6551 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6552 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6556 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6563 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6566 \begin_layout Subsection
6568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6570 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6575 \begin_inset Index idx
6578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6587 \begin_layout Standard
6588 The features described in this section require that the module
6590 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6592 is loaded in the document settings.
6593 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6599 \begin_inset Index idx
6602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6604 -packages ! enumitem
6612 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6613 Custom Enumerate Lists
6614 \begin_inset Index idx
6617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6618 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6626 \begin_layout Standard
6628 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6631 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6634 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6635 There you add the command
6638 \begin_layout Standard
6646 \begin_layout Standard
6658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6659 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6660 Code, look at section
6661 \begin_inset space ~
6665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6667 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6680 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6687 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6688 For capital Roman numerals replace
6700 in the command above.
6701 For Arabic numerals use
6709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6716 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6731 \begin_layout Standard
6733 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6741 You can only number 26
6742 \begin_inset space ~
6745 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6753 \begin_layout Standard
6754 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6755 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6758 \begin_layout Standard
6759 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6762 \begin_layout Enumerate
6763 \begin_inset Argument 1
6766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6789 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6796 \begin_layout Enumerate
6797 \begin_inset Argument 1
6800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6823 \begin_layout Enumerate
6825 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6832 \begin_layout Enumerate
6833 \begin_inset Argument 1
6836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6857 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
6864 \begin_layout Enumerate
6865 \begin_inset Argument 1
6868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6894 \begin_layout Standard
6895 For this list these commands were used:
6898 \begin_layout Standard
6909 \begin_inset Newline newline
6917 \begin_inset Newline newline
6925 \begin_inset Newline newline
6935 \begin_layout Standard
6942 makes the label emphasized and
6951 \begin_layout Standard
6952 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6960 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6961 lists until you change the definition.
6969 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6971 \begin_inset Index idx
6974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6975 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6983 \begin_layout Standard
6984 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6987 \begin_layout Enumerate
6988 \begin_inset Argument 1
6991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7010 \begin_inset Note Note
7013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7014 goes back to default numbering
7022 \begin_layout Enumerate
7026 \begin_layout Standard
7030 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7034 \begin_layout Standard
7035 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7040 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7041 to indicate that it is a resumed
7042 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7043 , but in the output.
7046 \begin_layout Standard
7047 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7055 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7064 \begin_layout Standard
7065 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7067 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7068 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7069 of a normal enumeration.
7070 There, insert the command
7073 \begin_layout Standard
7079 \begin_layout Standard
7084 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7088 \begin_layout Enumerate
7092 \begin_layout Enumerate
7096 \begin_layout Standard
7097 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7100 \begin_layout Enumerate
7101 \begin_inset Argument 1
7104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7120 This enumeration starts at 4
7123 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7125 \begin_inset Index idx
7128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7137 \begin_layout Standard
7138 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7140 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7143 \begin_layout Itemize
7147 \begin_layout Itemize
7148 with standard spacing
7151 \begin_layout Standard
7152 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7154 Add there the command
7158 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7161 \begin_layout Itemize
7162 \begin_inset Argument 1
7165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7184 \begin_layout Itemize
7188 \begin_layout Itemize
7192 \begin_layout Standard
7193 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7200 \begin_inset Index idx
7203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7205 -packages ! enumitem
7211 For more information see its documentation,
7212 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7221 \begin_layout Standard
7222 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7224 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7225 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7229 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7232 \begin_layout Enumerate
7233 \begin_inset Argument 1
7236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7244 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7257 \begin_layout Enumerate
7258 with negative indentation
7261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7262 Further Customization
7263 \begin_inset Index idx
7266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7267 Lists ! Customization
7275 \begin_layout Standard
7276 You can also change the style of description lists.
7280 \begin_layout Standard
7286 \begin_layout Standard
7287 changes the description label font, the command
7290 \begin_layout Standard
7296 \begin_layout Standard
7297 sets the list style.
7300 \begin_layout Standard
7301 An example where the command
7304 \begin_layout Standard
7309 itshape, style=nextline
7312 \begin_layout Standard
7316 \begin_layout Description
7318 \begin_inset space ~
7322 \begin_inset Argument 1
7325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7331 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7333 itshape, style=nextline
7343 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7344 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7348 \begin_layout Description
7350 \begin_inset space ~
7353 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7354 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7355 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7358 \begin_layout Standard
7359 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7365 \begin_inset Index idx
7368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7370 -packages ! enumitem
7376 For more information see its documentation
7377 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7386 \begin_layout Subsection
7388 \begin_inset Index idx
7391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7400 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7402 \begin_inset space ~
7405 Address: An Overview
7408 \begin_layout Standard
7409 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7410 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7418 \begin_inset space ~
7424 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7425 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7426 gags on the document.
7427 In contrast, you can use the
7434 \begin_inset space ~
7439 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7440 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7444 \begin_layout Standard
7445 Of course, you're not limited to using
7452 \begin_inset space ~
7461 \begin_inset space ~
7466 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7467 some European academic papers.
7470 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7474 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7481 \begin_layout Standard
7486 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7487 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7491 \begin_inset space ~
7496 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7497 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7498 Here's an example of each:
7501 \begin_layout Right Address
7503 \begin_inset Newline newline
7507 \begin_inset Newline newline
7511 \begin_inset Newline newline
7514 When is it? What is today?
7517 \begin_layout Standard
7521 \begin_inset space ~
7527 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7529 the largest block of text on a single line.
7530 Here's an example of the
7537 \begin_layout Address
7539 \begin_inset Newline newline
7542 Where do I send this
7543 \begin_inset Newline newline
7546 Your post office and country
7549 \begin_layout Standard
7550 As you can see, both
7557 \begin_inset space ~
7562 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7567 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7568 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7574 This makes sense, since
7582 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7583 Thus, you have to use
7590 arg "newline-insert newline"
7595 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7596 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7598 \begin_inset space ~
7602 \begin_inset space ~
7607 ) to start a new line in an
7614 \begin_inset space ~
7622 \begin_layout Subsection
7626 \begin_layout Standard
7627 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7628 or list of references.
7630 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7633 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7635 \begin_inset Index idx
7638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7647 \begin_layout Standard
7652 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7653 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7654 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7655 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7669 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7670 The book document classes ignores the
7674 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7678 in a letter document class.
7681 \begin_layout Standard
7686 environment does several things for you.
7687 First, it puts the centered label
7688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7696 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7698 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7699 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7700 the subsequent text.
7701 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7703 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7707 \begin_layout Standard
7708 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7712 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7713 The new paragraph will still be in the
7718 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7719 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7722 \begin_layout Standard
7723 \begin_inset Float figure
7728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7730 \begin_inset Graphics
7731 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7739 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7742 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7744 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7765 \begin_layout Standard
7766 We would love to demonstrate the
7770 environment, but since this document is in the
7771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7778 class, we can't do this.
7779 We inserted it therefore as figure
7780 \begin_inset space ~
7784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7786 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7791 If you have never heard of an
7792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7799 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7804 \begin_inset Index idx
7807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7816 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7823 \begin_layout Standard
7828 environment is used to list references.
7829 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7830 only use it at the end of the document.
7842 \begin_layout Standard
7843 When you first open a
7847 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7848 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7864 depending on the document class.
7865 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7866 Each paragraph of the
7870 environment is a bibliography entry.
7875 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7876 Each new paragraph is still in the
7883 \begin_layout Standard
7884 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7885 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7887 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7889 handling, have a look at section
7890 \begin_inset space ~
7894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7896 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7903 \begin_layout Subsection
7904 Special Environments
7907 \begin_layout Standard
7909 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7910 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7913 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7918 \begin_inset Index idx
7921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7929 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7931 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7938 \begin_layout Standard
7944 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7946 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7951 key as a fixed whitespace.
7955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7968 \begin_inset space ~
7973 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7987 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7990 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7993 arg "newline-insert newline"
8010 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8011 So, when you finish using the
8016 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8017 Also, you can nest the
8022 environment inside of others.
8025 \begin_layout Standard
8026 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8029 \begin_layout Itemize
8033 arg "newline-insert newline"
8036 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8041 \begin_inset space \space{}
8051 arg "newline-insert newline"
8057 \begin_layout Itemize
8061 arg "newline-insert newline"
8071 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8077 \begin_layout Itemize
8078 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8079 You must put at least one
8083 in any line you want blank.
8084 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8088 \begin_layout Itemize
8089 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8093 since that will insert
8098 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8101 arg "self-insert \""
8107 \begin_layout Standard
8111 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8115 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8119 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8123 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8127 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8128 printf("Hello World!
8133 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8137 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8141 \begin_layout Standard
8142 This is just the standard
8143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8154 \begin_layout Standard
8160 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8162 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8163 as if you used a typewriter.
8164 \begin_inset Index idx
8167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8168 Paragraph environments|)
8173 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8176 Program Code Listings
8181 \begin_inset space ~
8189 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8193 \begin_inset Index idx
8196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8205 \begin_layout Standard
8210 environment is similar to the
8215 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8216 computer console text.
8221 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8235 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8236 you can have empty lines.
8249 \begin_layout Itemize
8250 have a certain language and a text style
8253 \begin_layout Itemize
8254 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8255 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8256 and \SpecialChar TeX
8260 \begin_layout Standard
8261 Because of these properties
8265 works like a typewriter.
8269 \begin_layout Verbatim
8273 \begin_layout Verbatim
8276 The following 2 lines are empty:
8279 \begin_layout Verbatim
8283 \begin_layout Verbatim
8287 \begin_layout Verbatim
8288 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8293 \begin_layout Section
8294 Nesting Environments
8295 \begin_inset Index idx
8298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8299 Nesting ! Environments
8305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8314 \begin_layout Subsection
8318 \begin_layout Standard
8320 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8322 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8324 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8326 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8338 \begin_layout Enumerate
8342 \begin_layout Enumerate
8344 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8351 \begin_layout Enumerate
8355 \begin_layout Enumerate
8360 \begin_layout Enumerate
8364 \begin_layout Standard
8365 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8366 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8368 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8370 \begin_inset space ~
8374 \begin_inset space ~
8382 \begin_inset space ~
8386 \begin_inset space ~
8391 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8393 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8396 arg "depth-increment"
8402 arg "depth-decrement"
8416 arg "depth-increment"
8422 arg "depth-decrement"
8426 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8427 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8431 \begin_layout Standard
8432 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8433 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8434 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8435 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8436 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8439 \begin_layout Standard
8440 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8442 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8444 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8447 \begin_layout Subsection
8448 What You Can and Can't Nest
8451 \begin_layout Standard
8452 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8453 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8456 \begin_layout Standard
8457 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8458 than a simple yes or no.
8459 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8462 \begin_layout Itemize
8463 Completely unnestable
8466 \begin_layout Itemize
8467 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8471 \begin_layout Itemize
8472 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8476 \begin_layout Standard
8477 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8478 environments have them:
8481 \begin_layout Description
8482 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8483 Can't nest into them.
8484 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8491 \begin_layout Itemize
8497 \begin_layout Itemize
8503 \begin_layout Itemize
8509 \begin_layout Itemize
8515 \begin_layout Itemize
8522 \begin_layout Description
8524 \begin_inset space ~
8527 Nestable You can nest them.
8528 You can nest other things into them.
8529 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8536 \begin_layout Itemize
8542 \begin_layout Itemize
8548 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 \begin_layout Itemize
8560 \begin_layout Itemize
8566 \begin_layout Itemize
8572 \begin_layout Itemize
8578 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8592 \begin_layout Description
8593 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8594 You can't nest anything into them.
8595 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8602 \begin_layout Itemize
8608 \begin_layout Itemize
8614 \begin_layout Itemize
8620 \begin_layout Itemize
8626 \begin_layout Itemize
8632 \begin_layout Itemize
8638 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8650 \begin_layout Itemize
8656 \begin_layout Itemize
8662 \begin_layout Itemize
8668 \begin_layout Itemize
8674 \begin_layout Itemize
8680 \begin_layout Itemize
8684 \begin_inset space ~
8690 \begin_layout Itemize
8697 \begin_layout Standard
8698 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8706 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8716 \begin_inset space ~
8719 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8720 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8721 nested section headings violate this.
8729 \begin_layout Subsection
8730 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8731 \begin_inset Index idx
8734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8735 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8743 \begin_layout Standard
8744 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8745 affected by nesting anyhow.
8749 \begin_layout Itemize
8753 \begin_layout Itemize
8757 \begin_layout Itemize
8761 \begin_layout Standard
8763 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8771 Figures and tables in
8775 are not affected by this.
8780 Have a look at section
8781 \begin_inset space ~
8785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8787 reference "sec:Floats"
8791 for more information about
8798 \begin_layout Standard
8800 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8801 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8805 \begin_layout Standard
8806 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8814 of its own, it behaves just like a
8815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8822 paragraph environment.
8823 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8827 \begin_layout Standard
8828 Here's an example with a table:
8831 \begin_layout Enumerate
8833 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8840 \begin_layout Enumerate
8841 This is (a) and it's nested.
8842 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8849 \begin_layout Standard
8850 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8856 \begin_layout Standard
8858 \begin_inset Tabular
8859 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8860 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8861 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8862 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8946 \begin_layout Standard
8947 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8954 \begin_layout Enumerate
8956 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8960 \begin_layout Enumerate
8964 \begin_layout Standard
8965 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8968 \begin_layout Enumerate
8970 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
8977 \begin_layout Enumerate
8978 This is (a) and it's nested.
8982 \begin_layout Standard
8983 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8989 \begin_layout Standard
8991 \begin_inset Tabular
8992 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8993 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8994 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8995 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9079 \begin_layout Standard
9080 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9086 \begin_layout Enumerate
9093 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9096 \begin_layout Enumerate
9100 \begin_layout Standard
9101 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9105 \begin_layout Standard
9106 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9109 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9112 \begin_layout Enumerate
9114 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9121 \begin_layout Enumerate
9122 This is (a) and it's nested.
9125 \begin_layout Standard
9126 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9132 \begin_layout Standard
9134 \begin_inset Tabular
9135 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9136 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9137 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9138 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9223 \begin_layout Standard
9224 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9230 \begin_layout Enumerate
9232 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9239 \begin_layout Enumerate
9243 \begin_layout Standard
9244 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9250 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9251 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9255 \begin_layout Subsection
9256 Usage and General Features
9259 \begin_layout Standard
9260 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9261 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9270 is the innermost possible depth.
9271 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9274 \begin_layout Enumerate
9275 level #1 – outermost
9276 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9283 \begin_layout Enumerate
9285 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9292 \begin_layout Enumerate
9294 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9301 \begin_layout Enumerate
9303 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9310 \begin_layout Itemize
9312 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9319 \begin_layout Itemize
9328 \begin_layout Standard
9329 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9330 both of them in the example.
9331 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9341 For example, if we tried to nest another
9346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9353 , we would get errors.
9356 \begin_layout Subsection
9358 \begin_inset Index idx
9361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9370 \begin_layout Standard
9371 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9372 We have several examples of nested environments.
9373 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9377 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9378 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9381 \begin_layout Labeling
9382 \labelwidthstring MMM
9383 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9389 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9396 \begin_layout Labeling
9397 \labelwidthstring MMM
9398 #2-a This is level #2.
9399 We created it by using
9402 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9408 arg "depth-increment"
9412 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9419 \begin_layout Labeling
9420 \labelwidthstring MMM
9421 #3-a This is level #3.
9422 This time, we just enter
9429 arg "depth-increment"
9433 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9437 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9443 arg "depth-increment"
9447 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9454 \begin_layout Standard
9459 environment, nested inside of
9460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9468 So, it's at level #4.
9469 We did this by entering
9472 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9478 arg "depth-increment"
9481 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9486 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9502 \begin_layout Standard
9507 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9510 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9516 \begin_layout Labeling
9517 \labelwidthstring MMM
9518 #4-a This is level #4.
9522 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9525 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9530 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9534 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9539 keep nesting things inside
9540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9548 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9555 \begin_layout Labeling
9556 \labelwidthstring MMM
9557 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9559 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9566 \begin_layout Labeling
9567 \labelwidthstring MMM
9568 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9569 and this is level #6.
9570 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9574 \begin_layout Labeling
9575 \labelwidthstring MMM
9576 #5-b Back to level #5.
9580 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9586 arg "depth-decrement"
9593 \begin_layout Labeling
9594 \labelwidthstring MMM
9598 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9604 arg "depth-decrement"
9607 , we're back at level #4.
9611 \begin_layout Labeling
9612 \labelwidthstring MMM
9613 #3-b Back to level #3.
9614 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9618 \begin_layout Labeling
9619 \labelwidthstring MMM
9620 #2-b Back to level #2.
9625 \begin_layout Labeling
9626 \labelwidthstring MMM
9627 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9628 After this sentence, we will enter
9632 and change the paragraph environment back to
9639 \begin_layout Standard
9640 We could have also used the
9656 environment in place of the
9661 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9665 Example 2: Inheritance
9668 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9669 This is the \SpecialChar LyX
9670 -Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9673 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9682 arg "depth-increment"
9686 \begin_inset Newline newline
9689 which, we will change to the
9694 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9701 \begin_layout Enumerate
9706 environment, at level #2.
9709 \begin_layout Enumerate
9710 Notice how the nested
9714 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9719 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9723 \begin_layout Standard
9724 We ended this example by entering
9729 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9733 and reset the nesting depth by using
9736 arg "depth-decrement"
9742 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9743 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9752 \begin_inset Argument 1
9755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9756 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9764 \begin_layout Enumerate
9765 This is level #1, in an
9769 paragraph environment.
9770 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9771 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9778 \begin_layout Enumerate
9783 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9789 arg "depth-increment"
9793 Now, what happens if we nest an
9797 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9798 label be? An asterisk?
9799 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9806 \begin_layout Itemize
9816 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9817 So, its label is a bullet.
9818 (We got here by using
9821 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9827 arg "depth-increment"
9830 , then changing the environment to
9835 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9842 \begin_layout Itemize
9843 Here's level #4, produced using
9846 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9852 arg "depth-increment"
9856 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9858 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
9865 \begin_layout Enumerate
9868 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9873 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9877 , because we are in the
9885 environment (that is, it is an
9900 \begin_layout Enumerate
9905 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9906 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9910 \begin_layout Enumerate
9911 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9914 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9917 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9920 \begin_layout Enumerate
9924 arg "depth-decrement"
9927 to decrease the depth after the next
9930 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9937 \begin_layout Enumerate
9939 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9944 \begin_layout Enumerate
9946 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9947 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9951 \begin_layout Enumerate
9952 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9961 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9966 reset the counter for the label.
9970 \begin_layout Enumerate
9974 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9980 arg "depth-decrement"
9983 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9984 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9985 into the twofold-nested
9993 \begin_layout Enumerate
9994 The same thing happens if we do another
9997 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10003 arg "depth-decrement"
10006 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10009 \begin_layout Standard
10010 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10015 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10026 The number of other
10030 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10037 The same rule applies for the
10041 environment, as well.
10044 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10045 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10048 \begin_layout Enumerate
10049 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10050 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10051 the same detail with how we did it.
10057 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10064 \begin_layout Standard
10072 arg "depth-increment"
10079 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10080 the example in parentheses someplace.
10081 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10082 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10083 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10087 \begin_layout Enumerate
10092 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10093 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10100 \begin_layout Verse
10101 Now we will add verse.
10102 \begin_inset Newline newline
10105 It will get much worse.
10106 \begin_inset Newline newline
10116 arg "depth-increment"
10126 \begin_layout Verse
10127 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10128 \begin_inset Newline newline
10131 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10132 \begin_inset Newline newline
10138 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10146 \begin_layout Verse
10147 Here comes a table:
10148 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10155 \begin_layout Standard
10156 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10162 \begin_layout Standard
10164 \begin_inset Tabular
10165 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10166 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10167 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10168 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10253 \begin_layout Verse
10257 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10267 arg "depth-increment"
10273 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10279 \begin_inset Newline newline
10287 arg "depth-decrement"
10294 \begin_layout Enumerate
10299 : level #1) This is another item.
10300 Note that selecting a
10304 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10305 3 times to put the table inside the
10313 \begin_layout Quotation
10314 We're now ending the
10318 list and changing to
10323 We're still at level #1.
10324 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10325 The next set of paragraphs is a
10326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10333 We will nest both the
10340 \begin_inset space ~
10345 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10349 for the letter body.
10353 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10356 to preserve the depth.
10357 Remember that you need to use
10360 arg "newline-insert newline"
10363 to create multiple lines inside the
10370 \begin_inset space ~
10377 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10384 \begin_layout Right Address
10386 \begin_inset Newline newline
10389 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10390 \begin_inset Newline newline
10396 \begin_layout Address
10398 \begin_inset space ~
10404 \begin_layout Quotation
10405 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10409 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10410 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10411 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10412 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10413 as soon as possible.
10414 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10417 \begin_layout Quotation
10418 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10419 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10420 with your order, along with payment.
10423 \begin_layout Quotation
10424 We thank you again for your patience.
10427 \begin_layout Address
10429 \begin_inset Newline newline
10436 \begin_layout Quotation
10437 That ends that example!
10440 \begin_layout Standard
10441 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10442 gives you a lot of power with just
10444 We could have easily nested an
10465 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10468 \begin_layout Subsection
10470 \begin_inset Index idx
10473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10474 Nesting ! Separation
10480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10482 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10489 \begin_layout Standard
10490 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10492 For example you need two different enumerations:
10495 \begin_layout Enumerate
10497 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10504 \begin_layout Enumerate
10506 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10513 \begin_layout Enumerate
10517 \begin_layout Standard
10518 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10524 \begin_layout Itemize
10530 \begin_layout Standard
10531 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10537 \begin_layout Enumerate
10541 \begin_layout Enumerate
10545 \begin_layout Enumerate
10549 \begin_layout Standard
10550 To tell \SpecialChar LyX
10551 that there are two lists and not one, set the cursor at the end
10552 of the last item and use the menu
10554 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10555 Start New Parent Environment
10558 This adds an environment separator and a new list behind it.
10559 If you use instead the menu
10561 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10562 Start New Environment
10564 a new list will also be created, but in the same nesting level.
10567 \begin_layout Standard
10568 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10570 \change_deleted -1966299584 1432227810
10572 \change_inserted -1966299584 1432227815
10578 arg "paragraph-break"
10582 \change_deleted -1966299584 1432227824
10587 in the pull-down box for environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10589 \change_inserted -1966299584 1432229616
10590 until you get an environment separator in the form of a small angled arrow.
10591 The only difference between this separator and the one you obtain by using
10592 the menu (a reddish line) is that it will also insert a blank line in the
10598 \change_inserted -1966299584 1432230601
10599 However, each kind of separator can be turned into the other kind by right-clic
10600 king it and choosing the wanted type through the context menu that opens.
10601 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10604 arg "paragraph-break"
10607 in a Standard environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10608 Thus, in a normal workflow, you can insert two consecutive environments
10609 of the same type by simply pressing
10612 arg "paragraph-break"
10615 until you get an environment separator, after which any other kind of environme
10616 nt can be inserted (even of the same type).
10619 \begin_layout Standard
10621 \change_inserted -1966299584 1432231566
10622 If you load documents produced with a previous version of \SpecialChar LyX
10624 that the angled-arrow separator may appear at the end of a line.
10625 In this case it is not used to separate environments but rather to assure
10626 that the same \SpecialChar LaTeX
10627 output is obtained.
10628 Indeed, previous versions of \SpecialChar LyX
10629 could insert spurious blank lines in the
10631 output, which are now avoided.
10632 As those blank lines may affect vertical spacing, \SpecialChar LyX
10633 takes care that you
10634 obtain the same results as before.
10635 You can safely remove the separators automatically inserted for this purpose
10636 if you like better the resulting vertical spacing.
10641 \begin_layout Section
10642 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10643 \begin_inset Index idx
10646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10655 \begin_layout Standard
10656 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10657 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10659 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10660 be broken at the end of a line.
10661 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10665 \begin_layout Subsection
10667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10669 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10674 \begin_inset Index idx
10677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10686 \begin_layout Standard
10687 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10688 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10689 ) not to break the line at
10691 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10694 \begin_layout Quote
10695 Further documentation is given in section
10696 \begin_inset Newline newline
10700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10702 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10710 \begin_layout Standard
10711 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10726 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10735 A protected space is set with
10737 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10738 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10740 \begin_inset space ~
10748 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10754 \begin_layout Subsection
10756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10758 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10763 \begin_inset Index idx
10766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10767 Spacing ! Horizontal
10775 \begin_layout Standard
10776 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10778 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10779 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10783 The length units are listed in Appendix
10784 \begin_inset space ~
10788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10790 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10797 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10801 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10806 \begin_inset Index idx
10809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10810 Spaces ! Inter-word
10818 \begin_layout Standard
10819 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10820 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10821 at the ends of sentences.
10822 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10823 automatically takes care about this.
10824 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10825 followed by a period; see section
10826 \begin_inset space ~
10830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10832 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10837 To insert a normal space, select
10839 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10840 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10842 \begin_inset space ~
10850 arg "space-insert normal"
10856 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10860 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10865 \begin_inset Index idx
10868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10877 \begin_layout Standard
10879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10886 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10895 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10896 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10897 inside abbreviations:
10900 \begin_layout Quote
10902 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10906 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10909 \begin_layout Standard
10910 or between values and units.
10911 Compare for example this:
10912 \begin_inset Newline newline
10916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10920 \begin_inset Newline newline
10923 10 kg (normal space
10926 \begin_layout Standard
10927 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10929 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10930 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10932 \begin_inset space ~
10940 arg "space-insert thin"
10946 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10950 \begin_layout Standard
10951 You can also insert the following space types:
10954 \begin_layout Description
10956 \begin_inset space ~
10960 \begin_inset space ~
10963 space A line with a
10964 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10968 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10972 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10975 negative thin space between the arrows.
10978 \begin_layout Description
10980 \begin_inset space ~
10984 \begin_inset space ~
10987 space A line with a
10988 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10992 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10996 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10999 negative medium space between the arrows.
11002 \begin_layout Description
11004 \begin_inset space ~
11008 \begin_inset space ~
11011 space A line with a
11012 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11016 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11020 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11023 negative thick space between the arrows.
11026 \begin_layout Description
11028 \begin_inset space ~
11032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11036 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11040 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11044 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11048 \begin_inset space ~
11052 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11055 em) space between the arrows.
11058 \begin_layout Description
11060 \begin_inset space ~
11064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11068 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11072 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11076 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11080 \begin_inset space ~
11084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11087 em) space between the arrows.
11090 \begin_layout Description
11092 \begin_inset space ~
11096 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11100 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11104 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11108 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11112 \begin_inset space ~
11116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11119 em) space between the arrows.
11122 \begin_layout Description
11124 \begin_inset space ~
11128 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11132 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11137 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11144 cm space between the arrows.
11147 \begin_layout Standard
11149 \begin_inset space ~
11153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11155 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11159 lists the different space sizes.
11162 \begin_layout Standard
11163 \begin_inset Float table
11168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11169 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11174 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11178 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11188 \begin_inset Tabular
11189 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11190 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11191 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11192 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11308 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11360 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11388 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11431 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11444 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11467 \begin_inset Index idx
11470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11479 \begin_layout Standard
11480 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11481 feature for adding extra space
11482 in a uniform fashion.
11483 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11484 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11485 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11486 equally between themselves.
11489 \begin_layout Standard
11490 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11493 \begin_layout Quote
11495 This is on the left side
11496 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11499 This is on the right
11502 \begin_layout Quote
11505 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11509 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11515 \begin_layout Quote
11518 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11522 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11526 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11532 \begin_layout Standard
11533 That was an example in the
11539 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11543 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11547 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11550 is one in a standard paragraph.
11551 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11555 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11558 \begin_layout Standard
11559 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11562 \begin_inset space ~
11567 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11570 \begin_layout Standard
11572 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11576 \begin_inset space ~
11582 \begin_layout Standard
11584 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11588 \begin_inset space ~
11594 \begin_layout Standard
11596 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11600 \begin_inset space ~
11606 \begin_layout Standard
11608 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11612 \begin_inset space ~
11618 \begin_layout Standard
11620 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11624 \begin_inset space ~
11630 \begin_layout Standard
11632 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11636 \begin_inset space ~
11642 \begin_layout Standard
11643 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11651 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11655 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11657 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11658 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11662 option in the space dialog.
11670 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11674 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11679 \begin_inset Index idx
11682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11691 \begin_layout Standard
11692 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11693 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11696 \begin_layout Standard
11697 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11700 What is correct English?:
11701 \begin_inset Newline newline
11705 \begin_inset Newline newline
11709 \begin_inset space ~
11712 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11713 \begin_inset Newline newline
11717 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11728 \begin_inset Newline newline
11732 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11743 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11749 \begin_layout Standard
11751 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11756 \begin_inset space ~
11760 \begin_inset space ~
11764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11768 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11771 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11775 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11781 \begin_inset space ~
11785 \begin_inset space ~
11789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11792 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11801 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11802 That is why it is named
11803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11811 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11812 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11816 \begin_layout Subsection
11818 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11820 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11825 \begin_inset Index idx
11828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11837 \begin_layout Standard
11838 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11840 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11841 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11843 \begin_inset space ~
11849 There you find the following sizes:
11852 \begin_layout Standard
11865 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11866 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11871 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11873 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11874 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11876 \begin_inset space ~
11882 \begin_inset Index idx
11885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11886 Document ! Settings
11891 for the paragraph separation.
11892 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11903 \begin_layout Standard
11909 \begin_inset Index idx
11912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11918 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11919 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11924 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11925 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11934 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11943 s are described in section
11944 \begin_inset space ~
11948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11950 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11959 If there are several
11963 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11964 You can therefore use
11968 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11971 \begin_layout Standard
11976 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11977 \begin_inset space ~
11981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11983 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11990 \begin_layout Standard
11991 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12001 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12002 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12014 \begin_layout Subsection
12015 Paragraph Alignment
12016 \begin_inset Index idx
12019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12020 Paragraph ! Alignment
12028 \begin_layout Standard
12029 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12031 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12034 dialog (toolbar button
12037 arg "layout-paragraph"
12041 There are five possibilities:
12044 \begin_layout Itemize
12052 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12058 \begin_layout Itemize
12066 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12072 \begin_layout Itemize
12080 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12086 \begin_layout Itemize
12094 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12100 \begin_layout Itemize
12108 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12114 \begin_layout Standard
12115 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12116 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12117 the left and right margins.
12118 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12119 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
12125 \begin_layout Standard
12127 This paragraph is right aligned,
12130 \begin_layout Standard
12132 this one is centered,
12135 \begin_layout Standard
12137 this one is left aligned.
12140 \begin_layout Subsection
12142 \begin_inset Index idx
12145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12146 Page breaks ! Forced
12152 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12154 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12161 \begin_layout Standard
12162 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12163 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12164 force a page break where you want one.
12165 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12166 is good at page breaking.
12167 Only if you use a lot of
12171 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12172 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12175 \begin_layout Standard
12176 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12177 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12181 have to change the page breaking.
12184 \begin_layout Standard
12185 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12187 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12189 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12190 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12192 \begin_inset space ~
12198 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12200 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12201 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12203 \begin_inset space ~
12208 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12210 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12211 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12214 \begin_layout Standard
12215 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12216 at the top of a page.
12217 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12219 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12220 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12221 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12225 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12229 to learn more about
12236 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12240 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12245 \begin_inset Index idx
12248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12249 Page breaks ! Clear
12257 \begin_layout Standard
12258 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12259 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12260 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12261 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12262 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12265 \begin_layout Standard
12266 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12268 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12269 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12271 \begin_inset space ~
12277 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12279 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12280 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12282 \begin_inset space ~
12286 \begin_inset space ~
12291 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12292 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12295 \begin_layout Subsection
12297 \begin_inset Index idx
12300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12307 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12309 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12316 \begin_layout Standard
12317 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12319 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12321 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12322 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12324 \begin_inset space ~
12328 \begin_inset space ~
12336 arg "newline-insert newline"
12340 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12343 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12345 \begin_inset space ~
12349 \begin_inset space ~
12357 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12360 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12362 This is useful to avoid
12363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12370 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12373 \begin_layout Standard
12374 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12375 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12377 very good at line breaking.
12378 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
12379 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12380 \begin_inset space ~
12384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12386 reference "sec:Quote"
12391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12393 reference "sec:Verse"
12398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12400 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12407 \begin_layout Subsection
12409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12411 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12416 \begin_inset Index idx
12419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12428 \begin_layout Standard
12430 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12441 \begin_layout Standard
12445 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12446 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12448 \begin_inset space ~
12453 you can insert horizontal lines.
12454 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12455 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12456 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12459 \begin_layout Standard
12461 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12472 \begin_layout Section
12473 Characters and Symbols
12476 \begin_layout Standard
12477 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12478 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12479 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12487 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12491 for information on how this is done.
12494 \begin_layout Standard
12495 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12500 dialog via the menu
12502 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12503 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12509 \begin_layout Standard
12510 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12518 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12519 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12521 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12529 \begin_layout Section
12530 Fonts and Text Styles
12531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12533 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12540 \begin_layout Subsection
12542 \begin_inset Index idx
12545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12554 \begin_layout Standard
12555 There are two types of fonts:
12558 \begin_layout Description
12560 \begin_inset space ~
12564 \begin_inset Index idx
12567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12573 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12578 characters) in the font.
12579 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12580 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12581 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12582 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12583 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12584 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12585 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12586 \begin_inset Newline newline
12589 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12590 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12591 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12592 sizes than at small ones.
12593 \begin_inset Newline newline
12607 \begin_inset space ~
12615 \begin_layout Description
12617 \begin_inset space ~
12621 \begin_inset Index idx
12624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12630 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12631 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12632 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12633 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12634 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12635 image manipulation program.
12636 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12637 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12638 \begin_inset space ~
12641 pixels high up to 34
12642 \begin_inset space ~
12645 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12646 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12647 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12649 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12650 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12651 \begin_inset Newline newline
12654 Bitmap fonts are named
12657 \begin_inset space ~
12662 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12665 \begin_layout Standard
12666 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12667 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12668 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12669 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12670 use scalable fonts.
12673 \begin_layout Standard
12674 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12677 \begin_layout Standard
12678 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12679 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12680 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12681 font to emphasize text, you use an
12682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12690 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12692 In \SpecialChar LyX
12693 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12697 \begin_layout Subsection
12700 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12702 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12709 \begin_layout Standard
12710 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12711 used its own fonts.
12712 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12713 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12716 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12717 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12718 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12719 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12720 to a word processor.
12721 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12722 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12723 files are very portable across
12724 different machines.
12725 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12726 has increased a lot
12727 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12730 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12732 \begin_inset space ~
12736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12738 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12743 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12744 code in the document
12745 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12748 \begin_layout Standard
12749 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12750 engines that are also able directly
12751 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12753 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12755 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12757 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12758 that is installed on your system.
12759 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12762 \begin_layout Standard
12763 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12771 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12772 es; so you might have to experiment.
12780 \begin_layout Standard
12781 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12790 and especially Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12791 , are still rather new and thus not as mature as tradition
12792 al \SpecialChar LaTeX
12793 or PDF\SpecialChar TeX
12802 \begin_layout Subsection
12803 Document Font and Font size
12804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12806 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12811 \begin_inset Index idx
12814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12821 \begin_inset Index idx
12824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12833 \begin_layout Standard
12834 You can set the document fonts in the
12836 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12840 \begin_inset Index idx
12843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12844 Document ! Settings
12854 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12855 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12858 \begin_inset space ~
12867 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12869 \begin_inset space ~
12872 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12875 \begin_layout Standard
12882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12891 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12892 This requires that you use
12898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12937 as the output format, i.
12938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12942 \begin_inset space \space{}
12945 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12946 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12947 installed (see section
12948 \begin_inset space ~
12952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12954 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12959 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12961 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12962 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12964 \begin_inset space ~
12967 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12968 cannot determine the family.
12969 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12970 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12973 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12976 \begin_layout Standard
12977 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12978 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12983 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12989 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12990 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12998 \begin_inset space ~
13004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13017 European Computer Modern
13020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13027 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
13030 \begin_layout Standard
13039 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
13040 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13045 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
13048 \begin_inset space ~
13053 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13059 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13060 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13063 \begin_layout Itemize
13067 \begin_inset space ~
13072 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13085 \begin_inset space ~
13090 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13091 community in order to replace
13095 as the default font.
13096 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13097 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13100 \begin_inset space ~
13113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13114 One difference is improved kerning.
13122 \begin_layout Itemize
13126 \begin_inset space ~
13130 \begin_inset space ~
13135 fonts in (the rare) case that
13138 \begin_inset space ~
13143 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13158 Virtual means that it
13159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13170 -glyphs from other fonts.
13171 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13193 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13199 \begin_inset Index idx
13202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13204 -packages ! aeguill
13209 with the document preamble line
13210 \begin_inset Newline newline
13217 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13218 \begin_inset Newline newline
13223 will fix the guillemet problem.
13228 and that accented characters are not
13232 glyph, but built of
13236 characters, the accent and the letter.
13237 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13243 If you search for example for the French word
13244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13251 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13260 and not for the glyph
13261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13265 \begin_inset space ~
13269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13275 \begin_layout Itemize
13276 If you do not like the look of
13284 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13285 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13289 \begin_inset space ~
13295 \begin_inset space ~
13305 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13306 \begin_inset space ~
13309 serif and typewriter fonts,
13313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13314 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13315 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13321 \begin_inset space ~
13330 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13335 \begin_inset space \space{}
13343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13347 \begin_inset space \space{}
13353 \begin_inset space ~
13361 \begin_inset space ~
13371 but you can also select your own.
13372 \begin_inset Newline newline
13375 The differences between roman,
13378 \begin_inset space ~
13387 fonts are explained in section
13388 \begin_inset space ~
13392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13394 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13399 \begin_inset Newline newline
13405 \begin_inset space ~
13410 was originally designed for newspapers.
13411 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13412 into the small newspaper columns.
13416 \begin_inset space ~
13421 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13424 \begin_layout Standard
13425 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13438 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13443 depends on the class you are using.
13444 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13447 \begin_layout Standard
13448 Note that the font size is the
13453 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13454 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13455 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13456 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13459 \begin_inset space ~
13465 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13466 \begin_inset space ~
13470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13472 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13479 \begin_layout Standard
13483 \begin_inset space ~
13488 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13490 \begin_inset space ~
13493 serif or typewriter.
13498 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13508 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13511 \begin_layout Standard
13520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13529 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13530 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13536 \begin_inset Index idx
13539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13541 -packages ! fontenc
13547 \begin_inset space ~
13551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13553 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13558 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13559 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13566 \begin_layout Standard
13567 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13569 Use Old Style Figures
13573 Use True Small Caps
13576 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13579 Use Old Style Figures
13581 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13583 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13584 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13591 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13595 Use True Small Caps
13597 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13598 of scaled capitals.
13599 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13600 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13603 \begin_layout Standard
13608 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13609 a font to display the script characters.
13613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13614 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13620 \begin_inset Index idx
13623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13630 So this has no effect for the document language
13644 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13648 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13656 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13661 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13662 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13664 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13666 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13669 dialog, see section
13670 \begin_inset space ~
13674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13676 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13688 \begin_layout Subsection
13692 \begin_layout Standard
13693 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13694 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13696 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13697 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13698 choose a math font in the dialog
13700 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13704 \begin_inset Index idx
13707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13708 Document ! Settings
13714 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13715 automatically selects a math font.
13716 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13717 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13726 \begin_inset space ~
13732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13737 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13738 document font is available.
13741 \begin_layout Standard
13742 Note that the math font will not be used for
13746 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13752 or by the insertion of the command
13759 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13760 \begin_inset space ~
13764 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13765 while the math characters do not.
13767 \begin_inset space ~
13770 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13773 \begin_inset space ~
13781 \begin_inset space ~
13786 in the document font settings.
13789 \begin_layout Standard
13790 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13791 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13792 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13793 font (in most cases
13794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13800 \begin_inset space ~
13806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13809 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13810 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13818 \begin_inset space ~
13824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13830 \begin_layout Subsection
13831 Using Different Character Styles
13832 \begin_inset Index idx
13835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13842 \begin_inset Index idx
13845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13854 \begin_layout Standard
13855 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13856 automatically changes the character style for certain
13857 paragraph environments.
13859 supports two character styles,
13868 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13872 \begin_layout Standard
13877 style, do one of the following:
13880 \begin_layout Itemize
13881 click on the toolbar button
13890 \begin_layout Itemize
13891 use the key binding
13900 \begin_layout Standard
13901 These commands are all toggles.
13906 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13909 \begin_layout Standard
13910 One typically uses the
13914 style for proper names.
13916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13923 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13931 \begin_layout Standard
13932 A more widely used character style is the
13937 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13944 \begin_layout Itemize
13945 clicking on the toolbar button
13954 \begin_layout Itemize
13955 using the keybindings
13964 \begin_layout Standard
13969 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13971 use a different font.
13974 \begin_layout Standard
13975 We've been using the
13979 style all over the place in this document.
13980 Here's one more example:
13983 \begin_layout Quotation
13986 Do not overuse character styles!
13989 \begin_layout Standard
13990 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13991 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13992 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13993 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13997 \begin_layout Standard
13998 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
14006 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14008 \begin_inset space ~
14011 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14017 arg "dialog-show character"
14023 \begin_layout Subsection
14024 Fine-Tuning with the
14029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14031 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14036 \begin_inset Index idx
14039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14048 \begin_layout Standard
14049 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
14051 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
14052 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14053 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14054 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14055 from ordinary dialog.
14058 \begin_layout Standard
14059 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
14060 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
14061 \begin_inset Newline newline
14064 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14065 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14068 \begin_layout Standard
14069 To use custom character styles, open the
14071 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14073 \begin_inset space ~
14076 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14079 dialog or press the toolbar button
14082 arg "dialog-show character"
14086 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14087 font property that you can choose.
14088 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14091 \begin_inset space ~
14096 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14101 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14102 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14103 environments all at once.
14106 \begin_layout Standard
14107 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
14110 \begin_inset space ~
14122 \begin_layout Labeling
14123 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14137 The possible options are:
14138 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14145 \begin_layout Labeling
14146 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14151 This is the Roman font family.
14152 Normally a serif font.
14153 It's also the default family.
14163 \begin_layout Labeling
14164 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14168 \begin_inset space ~
14175 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14187 \begin_layout Labeling
14188 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14195 This is the Typewriter font family.
14201 arg "font-typewriter"
14210 \begin_layout Labeling
14211 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14216 This corresponds to the print weight.
14218 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14225 \begin_layout Labeling
14226 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14231 This is the Medium font series.
14232 It's also the default series.
14235 \begin_layout Labeling
14236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14243 This is the Bold font series.
14256 \begin_layout Labeling
14257 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14262 As the name implies.
14264 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14271 \begin_layout Labeling
14272 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14277 This is the Upright font shape.
14278 It's also the default shape.
14281 \begin_layout Labeling
14282 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14296 s the Italic font shape
14302 \begin_layout Labeling
14303 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14310 This is the Slanted font shape
14312 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14313 , this is different from italic).
14316 \begin_layout Labeling
14317 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14321 \begin_inset space ~
14328 This is the Small caps font shape
14335 \begin_layout Labeling
14336 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14341 Alters the text color.
14342 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14346 \begin_inset space ~
14351 , which means that the document default color set in
14353 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14354 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14360 \begin_inset space ~
14365 is used, you can choose between
14398 \begin_inset Index idx
14401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14410 \begin_layout Labeling
14411 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14416 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14417 the language of the document.
14418 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14419 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14421 \begin_inset Newline newline
14424 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14426 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14427 When using the spell checking (see section
14428 \begin_inset space ~
14432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14434 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14438 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14441 \begin_layout Labeling
14442 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14447 Alters the size of the font.
14448 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14449 proportional to the document font size.
14450 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14451 the details, but a general description of what
14454 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14461 \begin_layout Labeling
14462 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14483 arg "font-size tiny"
14489 \begin_layout Labeling
14490 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14511 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14517 \begin_layout Labeling
14518 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14539 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14545 \begin_layout Labeling
14546 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14567 arg "font-size small"
14573 \begin_layout Labeling
14574 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14588 It's also the default size.
14592 arg "font-size normal"
14598 \begin_layout Labeling
14599 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14620 arg "font-size large"
14626 \begin_layout Labeling
14627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14648 arg "font-size larger"
14654 \begin_layout Labeling
14655 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14676 arg "font-size largest"
14682 \begin_layout Labeling
14683 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14704 arg "font-size huge"
14710 \begin_layout Labeling
14711 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14732 arg "font-size giant"
14738 \begin_layout Labeling
14739 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14744 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14764 arg "font-size increase"
14770 \begin_layout Labeling
14771 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14776 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14796 arg "font-size decrease"
14803 \begin_layout Standard
14808 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14809 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14811 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14812 — use those instead.
14813 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14816 \begin_layout Labeling
14817 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14822 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14824 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
14831 \begin_layout Labeling
14832 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14839 This is text with emphasize on
14842 This might seem like the same as
14846 , but it is actually a bit different.
14852 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14854 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14857 \begin_layout Labeling
14858 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14865 This is text with Underbar on.
14871 arg "font-underline"
14877 \begin_inset Newline newline
14882 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14883 when you could not change fonts.
14884 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14885 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14886 because some people
14890 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14893 \begin_layout Labeling
14894 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14898 \begin_inset space ~
14905 This is text with Double underbar on.
14911 arg "font-underunderline"
14915 \begin_inset Newline newline
14918 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14919 about double underbar.
14922 \begin_layout Labeling
14923 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14927 \begin_inset space ~
14934 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14940 arg "font-underwave"
14944 \begin_inset Newline newline
14947 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14948 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14951 \begin_layout Labeling
14952 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14959 This is text with Strikeout on.
14965 arg "font-strikeout"
14969 \begin_inset Newline newline
14972 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14973 changed in the meantime.
14976 \begin_layout Labeling
14977 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14984 This is text with Noun on.
14991 , this is a logical attribute.
14992 Normally it's equivalent to
14995 \begin_inset space ~
15004 \begin_layout Standard
15005 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
15006 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
15008 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15010 \begin_inset space ~
15013 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15019 arg "dialog-show character"
15022 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
15023 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
15026 arg "textstyle-apply"
15030 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
15034 \begin_layout Standard
15035 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
15042 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
15043 (suppose you just set the shape to
15044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15062 \begin_inset space ~
15074 \begin_layout Standard
15075 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
15083 \begin_inset space ~
15095 \begin_layout Itemize
15101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15108 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15126 \begin_inset Newline newline
15130 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15144 \begin_inset Note Note
15147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15148 For more on phantoms see section
15149 \begin_inset space ~
15153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15155 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15165 \begin_inset Newline newline
15171 \begin_layout Itemize
15176 fonts use characters with serifs.
15177 These are the small
15178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15185 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15186 The following example shows the difference:
15187 \begin_inset Newline newline
15191 \begin_inset Newline newline
15196 text without serifs
15199 \begin_inset Newline newline
15202 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15203 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15210 \begin_layout Itemize
15215 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15216 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15217 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15220 \begin_layout Standard
15221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15228 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15229 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15232 \begin_inset space ~
15237 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15238 the property to be removed.
15239 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15240 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15241 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15259 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15260 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15268 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15272 \begin_inset space ~
15277 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15288 If you, for example, set
15289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15307 \begin_inset space ~
15312 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15321 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15324 \begin_layout Standard
15325 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15326 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15329 \begin_layout Section
15330 Printing and Previewing
15333 \begin_layout Subsection
15337 \begin_layout Standard
15338 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15339 using \SpecialChar LyX
15340 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15341 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15342 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15343 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15345 Additional Features
15350 \begin_layout Standard
15352 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15355 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15356 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15357 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15360 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15361 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15362 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15363 to turn your writing into printable output.
15364 This happens in two stages:
15367 \begin_layout Enumerate
15368 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15369 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15371 a file with the extension,
15372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15386 \begin_layout Enumerate
15387 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15388 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15389 to use the commands in the
15393 file to produce printable output.
15396 \begin_layout Subsection
15397 Output file formats
15398 \begin_inset Index idx
15401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15408 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15410 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15417 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15418 Simple text (ASCII)
15419 \begin_inset Index idx
15422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15423 File formats ! ASCII
15431 \begin_layout Standard
15432 This file type has the extension
15433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15445 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15449 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15456 \begin_layout Standard
15457 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15459 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15460 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15462 \begin_inset space ~
15468 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15469 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15470 bibliography (section
15471 \begin_inset space ~
15475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15477 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15482 If your document includes such material, use
15484 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15485 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15487 \begin_inset space ~
15491 \begin_inset space ~
15495 \begin_inset space ~
15503 \begin_inset space ~
15507 \begin_inset space ~
15513 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15514 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15517 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15520 \begin_inset Index idx
15523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15524 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15533 \begin_layout Standard
15534 This file type has the extension
15535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15546 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15549 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15550 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15551 -Errors or to process it manually
15552 with console commands.
15553 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15554 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15555 's temporary directory whenever you
15556 view or export your document.
15559 \begin_layout Standard
15560 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15561 -file using the menu
15563 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15564 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15579 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15580 export variants are explained in section
15581 \begin_inset space ~
15585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15587 reference "subsec:Export"
15594 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15596 \begin_inset Index idx
15599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15608 \begin_layout Standard
15609 This file type has the extension
15610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15630 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15631 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15632 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15636 \begin_layout Standard
15637 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15638 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15639 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15640 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15641 when you view the DVI.
15642 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15645 \begin_layout Standard
15646 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15648 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15649 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15654 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15655 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15657 \begin_inset space ~
15664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15674 The latter option uses the program
15676 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15682 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15685 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15686 font access (see section
15687 \begin_inset space ~
15691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15693 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15698 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15699 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15704 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15706 \begin_inset Index idx
15709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15710 File formats ! PostScript
15718 \begin_layout Standard
15719 This file type has the extension
15720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15732 PostScript was developed by the company
15736 as a printer language.
15737 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15739 PostScript can be seen as a
15740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15743 programming language
15744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15747 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15752 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15759 \begin_inset Index idx
15762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15764 -packages ! pstricks
15774 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15777 \begin_layout Standard
15778 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15782 Encapsulated PostScript
15783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15786 (EPS, file extension
15787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15799 As \SpecialChar LyX
15800 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15801 convert them in the background to EPS.
15802 If, for example, you have 50
15803 \begin_inset space ~
15806 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15808 \begin_inset space ~
15811 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15812 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15814 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15815 EPS to avoid this problem.
15818 \begin_layout Standard
15819 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15821 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15822 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15828 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15830 \begin_inset Index idx
15833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15840 \begin_inset Index idx
15843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15852 \begin_layout Standard
15853 This file type has the extension
15854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15870 Portable Document Format
15871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15878 was derived from PostScript.
15879 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15888 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15889 looks exactly the same.
15892 \begin_layout Standard
15893 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15897 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15901 (JPG, file extension
15902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15929 Portable Network Graphics
15930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15933 (PNG, file extension
15934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15946 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15947 converts them in the
15948 background to one of these formats.
15949 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15950 will slow down your workflow.
15951 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15954 \begin_layout Standard
15955 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15957 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15963 \begin_layout Description
15965 \begin_inset space ~
15968 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15972 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15975 \begin_layout Description
15977 \begin_inset space ~
15984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15991 X) This uses the program
15993 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15996 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15999 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16002 is a new engine, derived from
16006 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
16007 access (see section
16008 \begin_inset space ~
16012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16014 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16019 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16020 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16025 \begin_layout Description
16027 \begin_inset space ~
16034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16041 X) This uses the program
16046 that converts your file directly to PDF.
16052 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16053 font access (see section
16054 \begin_inset space ~
16058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16060 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16065 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
16066 vertically written Japanese.
16069 \begin_layout Description
16071 \begin_inset space ~
16074 (cropped) This is the same as
16077 \begin_inset space ~
16082 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
16083 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
16084 to generate good-looking
16085 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
16088 \begin_layout Description
16090 \begin_inset space ~
16093 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
16097 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
16101 \begin_layout Description
16103 \begin_inset space ~
16106 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
16110 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
16111 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
16115 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
16116 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
16119 \begin_layout Standard
16123 \begin_inset space ~
16132 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
16133 works without problems.
16134 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
16135 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
16139 \begin_inset space ~
16146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16158 \begin_inset space ~
16165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16174 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
16182 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16184 \begin_inset Index idx
16187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16188 FileFormats ! XHTML
16194 \begin_inset Index idx
16197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16206 \begin_layout Standard
16207 This file type has the extension
16208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16220 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16221 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16222 When \SpecialChar LyX
16223 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16224 suitable for the purpose.
16225 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16227 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16228 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16231 between different formats, which are described in section
16233 Math Output in XHTML
16238 \begin_inset space ~
16246 \begin_layout Standard
16247 XHTML output remains
16248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16255 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16256 features are supported yet.
16260 and the World Wide Web
16264 Additional Features
16266 manual, for more information.
16269 \begin_layout Standard
16270 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16272 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16273 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16280 \begin_layout Subsection
16282 \begin_inset Index idx
16285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16294 \begin_layout Standard
16295 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16296 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16305 or use the toolbar button
16312 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16313 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
16314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16320 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16324 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16332 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
16337 Further output formats can be selected via
16339 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16340 View (Other Formats)
16342 or the toolbar button
16343 \begin_inset Graphics
16344 filename ../images/view-others.png
16346 groupId toolbarbuttons
16353 \begin_layout Standard
16354 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16355 viewer window using the menu
16357 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16362 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16363 Update (Other Formats)
16368 \begin_layout Standard
16369 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16372 To have a real output, export your document.
16375 \begin_layout Section
16376 A few Words about Typography
16377 \begin_inset Index idx
16380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16389 \begin_layout Subsection
16390 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16391 \begin_inset Index idx
16394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16401 \begin_inset Index idx
16404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16413 \begin_layout Standard
16414 In \SpecialChar LyX
16416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16427 character comes in four lengths: the
16439 , and the minus sign:
16440 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16446 \begin_layout Standard
16447 \begin_inset Tabular
16448 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16449 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16450 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16451 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16452 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16453 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16482 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16522 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16547 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16549 \begin_inset space ~
16552 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16559 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16584 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16586 \begin_inset space ~
16589 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16610 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16644 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16650 \begin_layout Standard
16651 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16663 character multiple times in a row.
16664 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16665 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16698 \begin_layout Standard
16699 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16700 math mode and has a length of its own.
16701 Here are some examples:
16704 \begin_layout Enumerate
16705 line- and page-breaks
16706 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16716 \begin_layout Enumerate
16718 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16728 \begin_layout Enumerate
16729 Oh — there's a dash.
16730 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16740 \begin_layout Enumerate
16741 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16745 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16755 \begin_layout Subsection
16757 \begin_inset Index idx
16760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16769 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16776 \begin_layout Standard
16777 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16778 but automatically in the output.
16779 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16785 \begin_inset Index idx
16788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16795 following the rules of the document language.
16798 \begin_layout Standard
16800 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16804 font and with unusual constructs, like
16805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16813 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16814 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16815 This is done with the menu
16817 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16818 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16820 \begin_inset space ~
16826 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16828 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16832 \begin_layout Standard
16833 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16834 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16845 would then see the hyphen
16846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16853 as a hyphenation possibility.
16854 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16855 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16856 as described in section
16857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16860 Prevent Hyphenation
16861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16867 \begin_inset space ~
16875 \begin_layout Subsection
16877 \begin_inset Index idx
16880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16889 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16890 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16893 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16900 \begin_layout Standard
16901 When \SpecialChar LyX
16902 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16903 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16905 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16911 appropriate amount of space.
16912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16915 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16917 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16918 gets after another word.
16921 \begin_layout Standard
16922 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16923 not work in all cases.
16925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16936 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16937 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16940 \begin_layout Standard
16941 Here are some examples of
16945 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16948 \begin_layout Itemize
16953 \begin_layout Itemize
16958 \begin_layout Standard
16959 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16962 \begin_layout Itemize
16964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16968 this is too much space!
16971 \begin_layout Itemize
16976 \begin_layout Standard
16977 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16980 \begin_layout Standard
16981 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16984 \begin_layout Enumerate
16988 \begin_inset space ~
16993 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16994 \begin_inset space ~
16998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17000 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17005 \begin_inset Index idx
17008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17009 Spaces ! inter-word
17017 \begin_layout Enumerate
17021 \begin_inset space ~
17026 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17027 \begin_inset space ~
17031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17033 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17038 \begin_inset Index idx
17041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17050 \begin_layout Enumerate
17054 \begin_inset space ~
17058 \begin_inset space ~
17062 \begin_inset space ~
17069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17071 \begin_inset space ~
17076 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17077 This function is also bound to
17080 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17086 \begin_layout Standard
17087 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17090 \begin_layout Itemize
17092 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17096 \begin_inset space \space{}
17099 this is too much space!
17102 \begin_layout Itemize
17103 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17107 \begin_layout Standard
17108 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17109 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17111 will take care of this.
17114 \begin_layout Standard
17115 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17119 \begin_inset space ~
17125 feature described in the section
17127 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17132 Additional Features
17137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17139 \begin_inset Index idx
17142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17143 Typography ! Quotes
17149 \begin_inset Index idx
17152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17183 \begin_layout Standard
17185 usually sets quotes correctly.
17186 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
17187 and use a closing quote at the end.
17189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17197 The keyboard character,
17201 , generates this automatically.
17204 \begin_layout Standard
17205 You can specify what character the
17209 key produces using the submenu
17215 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17219 \begin_inset Index idx
17222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17223 Document ! Settings
17233 There are six choices:
17236 \begin_layout Labeling
17237 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17260 \begin_layout Labeling
17261 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17264 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17268 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17274 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17278 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17284 \begin_layout Labeling
17285 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17288 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17292 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17298 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17302 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17308 \begin_layout Labeling
17309 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17312 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17316 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17322 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17326 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17332 \begin_layout Labeling
17333 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17336 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17340 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17346 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17350 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17356 \begin_layout Labeling
17357 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17360 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17364 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17370 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17374 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17380 \begin_layout Standard
17381 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
17384 arg "quote-insert single"
17390 \begin_layout Subsection
17392 \begin_inset Index idx
17395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17396 Typography ! Ligatures
17402 \begin_inset Index idx
17405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17436 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17443 \begin_layout Standard
17444 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17445 print them as single characters.
17446 These groups are known as
17451 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17452 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17454 Here are the standard ligatures:
17457 \begin_layout Itemize
17461 \begin_layout Itemize
17465 \begin_layout Itemize
17469 \begin_layout Itemize
17473 \begin_layout Itemize
17477 \begin_layout Standard
17478 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17481 \begin_layout Standard
17482 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17483 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17491 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17507 To break a ligature, use
17509 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17510 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17512 \begin_inset space ~
17519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17530 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17547 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17555 \begin_layout Subsection
17558 \begin_inset Index idx
17561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17569 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17571 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17578 \begin_layout Standard
17579 You will certainly have noticed that the word “\SpecialChar LaTeX
17580 ” always appears with characters
17581 in different sizes and positions.
17583 is the name of the program used by \SpecialChar LyX
17584 and is therefore recognized as a proper
17585 name when you type it in \SpecialChar LyX
17587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17606 \begin_inset Note Note
17609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17610 The braces in \SpecialChar TeX
17611 Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper name
17612 in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
17617 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! \SpecialChar LyX
17618 recognizes the following
17622 \begin_layout Description
17624 The name of the game, write
17625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17646 \begin_layout Description
17648 The program used by \SpecialChar LaTeX
17650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17671 \begin_layout Description
17673 The program used by \SpecialChar LyX
17675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17696 \begin_layout Description
17697 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17698 The actual version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17721 \begin_layout Standard
17722 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17728 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17736 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17737 -world to give programs geek version numbers.
17738 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17739 converges to the number
17740 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17743 : The actual version is
17744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17752 , the previous one was
17753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17764 \begin_layout Standard
17765 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17766 you can insert two empty braces in \SpecialChar TeX
17768 In \SpecialChar LyX
17769 this will look like
17770 \begin_inset Graphics
17771 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17777 \begin_inset Newline newline
17780 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
17782 \begin_inset space ~
17786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17788 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17795 \begin_layout Subsection
17797 \begin_inset Index idx
17800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17809 \begin_layout Standard
17810 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17811 space between two words.
17812 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17822 for units use the menu
17824 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17825 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17827 \begin_inset space ~
17835 arg "space-insert thin"
17841 \begin_layout Standard
17842 Here is an example to show the differences:
17845 \begin_layout Standard
17846 \begin_inset Tabular
17847 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17848 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17849 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17850 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17857 \begin_inset space ~
17861 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17873 space between number and unit
17880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17885 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17889 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17901 half space between number and unit
17914 \begin_layout Subsection
17916 \begin_inset Index idx
17919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17920 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17928 \begin_layout Standard
17929 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17931 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17932 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17933 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17934 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17935 These bits of text became known as
17946 \begin_layout Standard
17947 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17948 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17949 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17950 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17951 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17952 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17953 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17954 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17955 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17956 \begin_inset Newline newline
17964 \begin_inset Newline newline
17972 \begin_inset Newline newline
17975 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17976 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17977 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17979 \begin_inset space ~
17983 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17985 key "latexcompanion"
17990 \begin_inset space ~
17994 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18000 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18001 's page break mechanism.
18004 \begin_layout Chapter
18005 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18008 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18015 \begin_layout Standard
18016 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18019 \begin_inset space ~
18025 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18028 \begin_layout Section
18030 \begin_inset Index idx
18033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18049 \begin_layout Standard
18051 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18054 \begin_layout Description
18057 \begin_inset space ~
18060 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18061 \begin_inset Newline newline
18065 \begin_inset Note Note
18068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18069 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18077 \begin_layout Description
18078 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18079 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18080 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18083 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18084 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18097 \begin_inset space ~
18103 \begin_inset Newline newline
18107 \begin_inset Note Comment
18110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18111 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18120 \begin_layout Description
18122 \begin_inset space ~
18125 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18126 set in the document settings under
18128 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18130 \begin_inset space ~
18136 \begin_inset Newline newline
18140 \begin_inset Newline newline
18144 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18153 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18154 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18159 of a comment that appears in the output.
18165 \begin_inset Newline newline
18169 \begin_inset Newline newline
18172 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18175 \begin_layout Standard
18176 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18184 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18188 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18191 \begin_layout Section
18193 \begin_inset Index idx
18196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18203 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18205 name "sec:Footnotes"
18212 \begin_layout Standard
18214 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18217 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18220 or the toolbar button
18223 arg "footnote-insert"
18235 \begin_inset Graphics
18236 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
18245 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18246 's representation of your footnote.
18256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18275 label, the box will
18279 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18280 Clicking on the box label again will close
18293 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18294 and click on the footnote
18309 \begin_layout Standard
18310 Here is an example footnote:
18318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18319 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18327 \begin_layout Standard
18328 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
18329 position where the footnote box is placed.
18330 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
18331 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
18332 according to the document class.
18334 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
18335 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
18341 ey are described in the
18344 \begin_inset space ~
18352 \begin_layout Section
18354 \begin_inset Index idx
18357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18364 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18366 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18373 \begin_layout Standard
18374 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18376 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18378 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18380 \begin_inset space ~
18385 or the toolbar button
18388 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18414 appearing within your text.
18415 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18416 's representation of your margin
18425 \begin_layout Standard
18426 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18430 \begin_inset Marginal
18433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18435 This is a marginal note.
18443 \begin_layout Standard
18444 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18445 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18446 pages, right on odd pages.
18449 \begin_layout Standard
18450 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18453 \begin_inset space ~
18461 \begin_inset space ~
18469 \begin_layout Section
18470 Graphics and Images
18471 \begin_inset Index idx
18474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18481 \begin_inset Index idx
18484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18493 name "sec:Graphics"
18500 \begin_layout Standard
18501 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18502 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18505 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18510 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18514 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18517 \begin_layout Standard
18518 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18523 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18524 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18526 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18527 \begin_inset space ~
18531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18533 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18540 \begin_layout Standard
18545 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18546 of the image in the output.
18547 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18551 \begin_inset space ~
18555 \begin_inset space ~
18564 \begin_inset space ~
18568 \begin_inset space ~
18572 \begin_inset space ~
18577 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18578 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18586 \begin_layout Standard
18593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18601 \begin_inset space ~
18605 \begin_inset space ~
18612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18621 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18622 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18624 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18629 \begin_inset space ~
18634 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18635 with the image size is printed.
18639 \begin_inset space ~
18643 \begin_inset space ~
18647 \begin_inset space ~
18652 is explained in the
18655 \begin_inset space ~
18667 \begin_layout Standard
18668 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18669 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18671 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18672 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
18678 \begin_layout Standard
18680 \begin_inset Graphics
18681 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18689 \begin_layout Standard
18690 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18691 the image into a float, see section
18692 \begin_inset space ~
18696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18698 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18705 \begin_layout Subsection
18707 \begin_inset Index idx
18710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18719 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18726 \begin_layout Standard
18727 You can insert images in any known file format.
18728 But as we explained in section
18729 \begin_inset space ~
18733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18735 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18739 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18741 therefore uses the program
18745 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18746 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18747 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18748 \begin_inset space ~
18752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18754 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18761 \begin_layout Standard
18762 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18765 \begin_layout Description
18767 \begin_inset space ~
18770 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18771 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18772 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18776 Graphics Interchange Format
18777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18780 (GIF, file extension
18781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18793 \begin_inset Index idx
18796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18828 Portable Network Graphics
18829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18832 (PNG, file extension
18833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18845 \begin_inset Index idx
18848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18880 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18884 (JPG, file extension
18885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18909 \begin_inset Index idx
18912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18943 \begin_layout Description
18945 \begin_inset space ~
18948 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18950 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18951 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18952 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18953 \begin_inset Newline newline
18956 Scalable image formats can be
18957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18960 Scalable Vector Graphics
18961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18964 (SVG, file extension
18965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18977 \begin_inset Index idx
18980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19012 Encapsulated PostScript
19013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19016 (EPS, file extension
19017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19029 \begin_inset Index idx
19032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19064 Portable Document Format
19065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19068 (PDF, file extension
19069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19081 \begin_inset Index idx
19084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19099 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19100 result will not be scalable.
19101 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19107 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19115 \begin_layout Standard
19116 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19123 \begin_layout Subsection
19124 Grouping of Image Settings
19125 \begin_inset Index idx
19128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19129 Images ! Settings grouping
19137 \begin_layout Standard
19138 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19140 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19141 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19143 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19144 need to manually change each of them.
19148 \begin_layout Standard
19149 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19152 \begin_inset space ~
19156 \begin_inset space ~
19171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19179 \begin_inset space ~
19183 \begin_inset space ~
19190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19200 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19201 and checking the name of the desired group.
19204 \begin_layout Section
19206 \begin_inset Index idx
19209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19216 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19225 \begin_layout Standard
19226 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19229 arg "tabular-insert"
19234 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19238 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19239 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19240 from the rest of the table.
19241 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19242 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19244 Here is an example table:
19245 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
19251 \begin_layout Standard
19253 \begin_inset Tabular
19254 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19255 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19256 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19257 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19258 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19259 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19459 \begin_layout Subsection
19463 \begin_layout Standard
19464 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19467 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19471 This brings up the table dialog.
19472 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19473 cursor is placed currently.
19474 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19475 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19476 done on all of your selection.
19479 \begin_layout Standard
19480 In addition to the table dialog, the
19483 \begin_inset space ~
19488 helps you in setting table properties.
19489 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19492 \begin_layout Standard
19496 \begin_inset space ~
19501 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19502 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19503 current cell respectively.
19504 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19506 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19507 of text, see section
19508 \begin_inset space ~
19512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19514 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19521 \begin_layout Standard
19522 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19523 using the check box
19532 This will merge the cells to
19536 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19537 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19538 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19539 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19540 in the last row without the upper border:
19541 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
19547 \begin_layout Standard
19549 \begin_inset Tabular
19550 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19551 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19552 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19553 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19554 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19555 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19566 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19575 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19651 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19686 \begin_layout Standard
19687 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19688 -arguments for the table.
19689 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19690 explained in the chapter
19697 \begin_inset space ~
19703 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19704 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19705 but are visible in the output.
19708 \begin_layout Standard
19709 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19717 Most DVI-viewers are
19721 able to display rotations.
19729 \begin_layout Standard
19734 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19739 adds lines for all cell borders.
19742 \begin_layout Subsection
19744 \begin_inset Index idx
19747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19748 Tables ! Longtables
19754 \begin_inset Index idx
19757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19766 \begin_layout Standard
19767 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19770 \begin_inset space ~
19774 \begin_inset space ~
19783 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19784 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19787 \begin_layout Description
19792 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19793 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19794 except for the first page, if
19797 \begin_inset space ~
19805 \begin_layout Description
19809 \begin_inset space ~
19814 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19815 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19818 \begin_layout Description
19823 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19824 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19825 except for the last page, if
19828 \begin_inset space ~
19836 \begin_layout Description
19840 \begin_inset space ~
19845 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19846 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19849 \begin_layout Description
19850 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19851 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19853 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19857 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19860 \begin_inset space ~
19868 \begin_layout Standard
19869 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19870 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19871 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19877 In this context, first means first in this order:
19880 \begin_inset space ~
19892 \begin_inset space ~
19897 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19898 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
19904 \begin_layout Standard
19906 \begin_inset Tabular
19907 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19908 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19909 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19910 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19911 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19912 <row endfirsthead="true">
19913 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19919 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19924 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19933 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19943 <row endfirsthead="true">
19944 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19955 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19964 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19976 <row endhead="true">
19977 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19997 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20007 <row endhead="true">
20008 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20019 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20028 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20040 <row endfoot="true">
20041 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20052 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20061 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20092 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21033 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21042 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21051 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21062 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21093 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21124 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21155 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21186 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21217 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21248 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21279 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21310 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21341 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21372 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21403 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21434 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21465 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21496 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21527 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21558 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21589 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21620 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21651 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21682 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21713 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21744 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21775 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21806 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21837 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21868 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21899 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21930 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21961 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21992 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22022 <row endlastfoot="true">
22023 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22034 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22043 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22060 \begin_layout Subsection
22062 \begin_inset Index idx
22065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22072 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22074 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22081 \begin_layout Standard
22082 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22083 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22084 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22085 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22089 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22092 \begin_layout Standard
22093 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22094 for the column in the table dialog.
22095 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22096 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22098 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
22104 \begin_layout Standard
22106 \begin_inset Tabular
22107 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22108 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22109 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22110 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22111 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22131 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22200 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22256 This is longer now.
22261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22312 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22313 This is longer now.
22318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22344 \begin_layout Standard
22345 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22346 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22351 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22352 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22358 Selection with the mouse or with
22362 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22363 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22364 the selection from outside the table.
22367 \begin_layout Section
22369 \begin_inset Index idx
22372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22388 \begin_layout Subsection
22392 \begin_layout Standard
22393 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22394 have a fixed location.
22396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22403 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
22411 \begin_inset space ~
22416 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22417 too many notes on the current page.
22420 \begin_layout Standard
22421 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
22422 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
22423 and pages without text.
22424 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
22425 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
22426 Floats are therefore numbered.
22427 Referencing is described in section
22428 \begin_inset space ~
22432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22434 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22441 \begin_layout Standard
22442 To insert a float, use the menu
22444 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22448 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
22449 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
22451 After the label you can insert the caption text.
22452 \begin_inset Index idx
22455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22461 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22462 paragraph within the float.
22463 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22464 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22465 left-clicking on the box label.
22466 A closed float box looks like this:
22467 \begin_inset Graphics
22468 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
22473 – a gray button with a red label.
22476 \begin_layout Standard
22477 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22479 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22482 \begin_layout Subsection
22484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22486 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22491 \begin_inset Index idx
22494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22495 Floats ! Figure floats
22503 \begin_layout Standard
22505 \begin_inset space ~
22509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22511 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22515 was created using the menu
22517 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22518 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22524 arg "float-insert figure"
22528 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22531 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22537 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22541 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22542 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22544 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22546 \begin_inset space ~
22554 arg "layout-paragraph"
22560 \begin_layout Standard
22561 \begin_inset Float figure
22566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22568 \begin_inset Graphics
22569 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22579 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22584 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22588 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22601 \begin_layout Standard
22602 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22603 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22605 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22614 ) and refer to it using the menu
22616 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22622 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22626 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22627 vague references like
22628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22635 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22636 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22646 For more about cross-references, see section
22647 \begin_inset space ~
22651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22653 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22660 \begin_layout Standard
22661 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22662 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22663 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22664 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22665 as described in section
22666 \begin_inset space ~
22670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22672 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22678 \begin_inset space ~
22682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22684 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22688 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22689 You can also set the images one below the other.
22691 \begin_inset space ~
22695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22697 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22704 reference "fig:Platypus"
22708 are the subfigures.
22711 \begin_layout Standard
22712 \begin_inset Float figure
22717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22718 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22722 \begin_inset Float figure
22727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22728 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22733 name "fig:Undefinable"
22745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22746 \begin_inset Graphics
22747 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22758 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22762 \begin_inset Float figure
22767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22768 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22771 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22773 name "fig:Platypus"
22785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22786 \begin_inset Graphics
22787 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22799 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22806 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22811 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22815 Two distorted images.
22828 \begin_layout Subsection
22830 \begin_inset Index idx
22833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22834 Floats ! Table floats
22842 \begin_layout Standard
22843 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22845 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22846 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22849 or the toolbar button
22852 arg "float-insert table"
22856 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22857 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22858 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22860 \begin_inset space ~
22864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22866 reference "tab:Table-float"
22873 \begin_layout Standard
22874 \begin_inset Float table
22879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22880 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22885 name "tab:Table-float"
22897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22899 \begin_inset Tabular
22900 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22901 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22902 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22903 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22904 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23031 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23052 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23055 \end{array}\right]$
23063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23076 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23097 \begin_layout Subsection
23099 \begin_inset Index idx
23102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23111 \begin_layout Standard
23113 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23114 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23115 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23117 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23125 \begin_inset space ~
23133 \begin_layout Section
23135 \begin_inset Index idx
23138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23147 \begin_layout Standard
23149 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23151 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23152 \begin_inset space \space{}
23159 \begin_layout Standard
23160 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23161 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23163 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23167 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23168 and its alignment within the page.
23169 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
23175 \begin_layout Standard
23177 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23187 height_special "totalheight"
23192 backgroundcolor "none"
23195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23198 This is a minipage.
23199 The text is set in an italic style.
23202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23205 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23206 another formatting.
23214 \begin_layout Standard
23215 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23218 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23222 as described in section
23223 \begin_inset space ~
23227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23229 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23234 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23240 \begin_layout Standard
23241 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23251 height_special "totalheight"
23256 backgroundcolor "none"
23259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23260 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23261 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23267 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23271 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23281 height_special "totalheight"
23286 backgroundcolor "none"
23289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23290 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23291 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23299 \begin_layout Standard
23300 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23306 \begin_layout Standard
23307 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23309 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23316 \begin_inset space ~
23324 \begin_layout Chapter
23325 Mathematical Formulas
23326 \begin_inset Index idx
23329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23336 \begin_inset Index idx
23339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23370 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23377 \begin_layout Standard
23378 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23383 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23386 \begin_layout Section
23388 \begin_inset Index idx
23391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23400 \begin_layout Standard
23401 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23414 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
23416 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
23417 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23418 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23420 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23426 \begin_layout Standard
23427 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
23431 \begin_inset space ~
23436 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
23439 \begin_layout Standard
23440 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
23441 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
23444 \begin_layout Standard
23445 This is a line with an inline formula
23446 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
23452 \begin_layout Standard
23453 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
23454 paragraph, like this one:
23455 \begin_inset Formula
23462 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23465 \begin_layout Standard
23467 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23469 For example, typing
23470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23483 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23484 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23488 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23491 \begin_inset space ~
23499 \begin_layout Subsection
23500 Navigating in Formulas
23501 \begin_inset Index idx
23504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23513 \begin_layout Standard
23514 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23515 achieved with the arrow keys.
23517 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23518 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23523 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23524 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23528 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23532 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23535 \end{array}\right]$
23543 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23548 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23549 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23552 \begin_layout Standard
23557 , printed in this document as
23558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23562 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23569 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23570 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23571 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23576 For example, if you want
23577 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23585 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23595 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23599 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23604 , since in the latter case only the
23607 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23612 will be under the square root sign:
23613 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23619 \begin_layout Standard
23620 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23622 \begin_inset Formula
23624 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23633 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23634 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23637 \begin_layout Subsection
23641 \begin_layout Standard
23642 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23643 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23647 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23648 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23649 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23650 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23651 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23655 \begin_layout Subsection
23656 Exponents and Subscripts
23657 \begin_inset Index idx
23660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23667 \begin_inset Index idx
23670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23679 \begin_layout Standard
23680 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23683 arg "math-superscript"
23689 arg "math-subscript"
23692 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23694 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23697 , type in a formula
23700 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23710 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23716 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23720 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23726 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23732 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23741 , you have to use an extra
23745 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23746 For example, if you want
23747 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23753 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23759 Subscripts are similar: To get
23760 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23766 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23774 \begin_layout Subsection
23776 \begin_inset Index idx
23779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23788 \begin_layout Standard
23789 Create a fraction either with the command
23795 or by using the icon
23798 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23804 \begin_inset space ~
23810 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23811 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23812 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23817 To move back up, press
23822 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23823 \begin_inset Formula
23825 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23828 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23836 \begin_layout Subsection
23838 \begin_inset Index idx
23841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23850 \begin_layout Standard
23851 Roots can be created using the
23854 \begin_inset space ~
23862 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23868 arg "math-insert \\root"
23890 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23896 always produces a square root.
23899 \begin_layout Subsection
23900 Operators with Limits
23901 \begin_inset Index idx
23904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23911 \begin_inset Index idx
23914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23921 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23923 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23930 \begin_layout Standard
23932 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23936 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23939 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23940 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23941 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23942 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23943 The sum operator will automatically place its
23944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23951 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23953 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23957 \begin_inset Formula
23959 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23964 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23968 \begin_layout Standard
23969 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23971 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23972 behind the operator and using the menu
23974 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23975 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23977 \begin_inset space ~
23981 \begin_inset space ~
23995 \begin_layout Standard
23996 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24005 \begin_inset Index idx
24008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24015 \begin_inset Formula
24017 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24022 which will place the
24023 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24035 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24036 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24042 \begin_layout Standard
24043 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24050 Have a look at section
24051 \begin_inset space ~
24055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24057 reference "subsec:Functions"
24061 for an explanation of function macros.
24064 \begin_layout Subsection
24066 \begin_inset Index idx
24069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24078 \begin_layout Standard
24079 Most math symbols can be found in the
24082 \begin_inset space ~
24087 under one of several categories; including
24104 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24108 \begin_layout Standard
24109 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24110 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24111 don't have to use the
24114 \begin_inset space ~
24119 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24121 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24124 \begin_layout Subsection
24126 \begin_inset Index idx
24129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24138 \begin_layout Standard
24139 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24145 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24151 \begin_inset space ~
24159 arg "math-insert \\space"
24163 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24164 For example, the sequence
24169 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24172 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24174 \begin_inset Graphics
24175 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24180 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24181 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24182 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24183 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24184 , because they are negative
24186 Here are two examples:
24189 \begin_layout Standard
24199 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24205 \begin_layout Standard
24215 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24221 \begin_layout Subsection
24223 \begin_inset Index idx
24226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24235 name "subsec:Functions"
24242 \begin_layout Standard
24246 \begin_inset space ~
24251 contains under the button
24254 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24257 a number of function macros, such as
24258 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24262 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24270 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24277 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24278 avoid confusions, because
24279 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24283 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24289 \begin_layout Standard
24290 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24292 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24296 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24302 \begin_layout Standard
24303 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24304 are placed, as described in section
24305 \begin_inset space ~
24309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24311 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24318 \begin_layout Subsection
24320 \begin_inset Index idx
24323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24332 \begin_layout Standard
24333 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24335 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24336 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24337 commands, for example, to enter
24338 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24341 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24342 Our example is entered by typing
24347 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24354 \begin_inset space ~
24358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24360 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24364 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24367 \begin_layout Standard
24368 \begin_inset Float table
24373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24374 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24379 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24383 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24393 \begin_inset Tabular
24394 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24395 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24396 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24397 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24398 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24482 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24536 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24590 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24644 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24698 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24752 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24806 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24860 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24914 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24959 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24980 \begin_layout Standard
24981 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24984 \begin_inset space ~
24992 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24995 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24999 \begin_layout Section
25000 Brackets and Delimiters
25001 \begin_inset Index idx
25004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25011 \begin_inset Index idx
25014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25023 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25030 \begin_layout Standard
25031 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25033 For some purposes, using just the keys
25038 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25039 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25040 toolbar delimiter icon
25043 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25047 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25048 \begin_inset Formula
25050 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25058 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25059 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25063 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25066 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25072 \begin_inset Formula
25074 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25082 \begin_layout Standard
25083 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25084 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25088 \begin_layout Standard
25089 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25090 left side and right side.
25091 If you use the option
25094 \begin_inset space ~
25099 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25100 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25102 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25107 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25108 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25111 \begin_layout Standard
25112 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25113 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25114 is to go inside the brackets.
25115 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25120 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25121 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25122 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25126 arg "math-delim ( )"
25132 \begin_layout Section
25133 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25134 \begin_inset Index idx
25137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25144 \begin_inset Index idx
25147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25154 \begin_inset Index idx
25157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25158 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25166 \begin_layout Standard
25167 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25171 \begin_inset space ~
25179 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25183 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25184 Here is an example:
25185 \begin_inset Formula
25187 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25196 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25197 \begin_inset space ~
25201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25203 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25208 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25209 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25210 This alignment is set in the box
25215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25264 for every column as default.
25265 For example, the sequence
25266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25277 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25278 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25279 corresponds to the relevant column.
25280 The result will look like this:
25281 \begin_inset Formula
25284 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25285 column & has & has\,right\\
25286 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25295 \begin_layout Standard
25296 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25299 arg "newline-insert newline"
25302 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25303 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25305 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25308 or the math toolbar.
25311 \begin_layout Standard
25312 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25313 It can be created with the menu
25315 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25316 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25318 \begin_inset space ~
25330 Here is an example:
25331 \begin_inset Formula
25345 \begin_layout Standard
25346 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25349 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25352 arg "newline-insert newline"
25356 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25361 arg "newline-insert newline"
25364 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25372 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25373 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25374 A new row is created by every further entry of
25377 arg "newline-insert newline"
25381 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25382 Here is an example:
25383 \begin_inset Formula
25385 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25386 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25391 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25392 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25393 \begin_inset Formula
25395 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25403 \begin_layout Standard
25404 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25411 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25412 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25415 reference "eq:asquared"
25420 The other types are described in section
25421 \begin_inset space ~
25425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25427 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25434 \begin_layout Section
25435 Formula Numbering and Referencing
25436 \begin_inset Index idx
25439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25440 Math ! Formula numbering
25446 \begin_inset Index idx
25449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25450 Math ! Referencing formulas
25456 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25458 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25465 \begin_layout Standard
25466 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25468 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25469 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25471 \begin_inset space ~
25475 \begin_inset space ~
25483 arg "math-number-toggle"
25487 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25488 within parentheses.
25489 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25490 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25491 the document class.
25492 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25493 separated by a dot:
25494 \begin_inset Formula
25504 arg "math-number-toggle"
25507 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25508 You can only number displayed formulas.
25511 \begin_layout Standard
25512 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25514 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25515 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25517 \begin_inset space ~
25521 \begin_inset space ~
25529 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25532 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25533 \begin_inset Formula
25536 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25542 To number all lines use the shortcut
25545 arg "math-number-toggle"
25551 \begin_layout Standard
25552 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25555 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25556 A label is inserted with the menu
25558 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25567 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25568 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25569 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25581 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25582 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25583 We inserted in the following example the label
25584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25591 in the second line:
25592 \begin_inset Formula
25594 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25595 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25600 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25601 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25602 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25606 \begin_inset space ~
25614 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25618 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25619 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25620 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25621 as the formula number:
25624 \begin_layout Standard
25625 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25628 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25635 \begin_layout Standard
25636 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25637 's cross-reference box are described in section
25638 \begin_inset space ~
25642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25644 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25649 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25657 \begin_layout Section
25658 User defined math macros
25659 \begin_inset Index idx
25662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25671 \begin_layout Standard
25673 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25674 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25675 Math macros are explained in section
25678 \begin_inset space ~
25690 \begin_layout Section
25694 \begin_layout Subsection
25696 \begin_inset Index idx
25699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25708 \begin_layout Standard
25709 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25710 To set a font in a formula, use the
25713 \begin_inset space ~
25721 arg "math-insert \\font"
25724 , or enter its command, listed in table
25725 \begin_inset space ~
25729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25731 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25738 \begin_layout Standard
25739 \begin_inset Float table
25744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25745 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25750 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25754 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25764 \begin_inset Tabular
25765 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25766 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25767 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25768 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25800 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25827 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25854 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25887 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25914 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25941 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25975 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26002 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26036 \begin_layout Standard
26037 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26045 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26061 \begin_layout Standard
26062 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26063 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26068 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26069 space when you need a space in the box.
26070 Here is an example where
26071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26082 denotes the set of numbers:
26083 \begin_inset Formula
26085 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26093 \begin_layout Standard
26094 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26095 You can, for example, put a character in
26104 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26108 \begin_inset Newline newline
26111 So it is better not to use this feature.
26114 \begin_layout Standard
26115 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26116 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26120 \begin_inset Newline newline
26123 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26129 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26130 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26136 \begin_layout Standard
26143 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26146 \begin_layout Standard
26147 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26149 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26150 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26152 \begin_inset space ~
26160 \begin_layout Subsection
26162 \begin_inset Index idx
26165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26174 \begin_layout Standard
26175 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26177 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26181 \begin_inset space ~
26185 \begin_inset space ~
26193 \begin_inset space ~
26201 arg "math-insert \\font"
26205 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26206 in black instead of blue.
26207 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26208 Here is an example:
26209 \begin_inset Formula
26212 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26213 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26222 \begin_layout Subsection
26224 \begin_inset Index idx
26227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26236 \begin_layout Standard
26237 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26238 automatically chosen in most situations.
26256 For most characters,
26264 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26265 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26270 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26271 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26272 thinks are appropriate.
26273 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26276 arg "math-insert \\style"
26280 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26281 For example, you can set
26282 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26285 , which is normally in
26294 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26298 The four styles are used in the following example:
26301 \begin_layout Standard
26302 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26306 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26310 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26314 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26320 \begin_layout Standard
26321 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26322 is set in a particular size with the menu
26324 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26326 \begin_inset space ~
26331 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26332 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26333 will be adjusted to correspond.
26334 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26345 \begin_layout Standard
26349 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26355 \begin_layout Section
26356 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26358 \begin_inset Index idx
26361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26368 \begin_inset Index idx
26371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26380 \begin_layout Standard
26382 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26383 that are in common use.
26386 \begin_layout Subsection
26387 Enabling AMS-Support
26390 \begin_layout Standard
26391 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26392 the document by selecting the checkbox
26395 \begin_inset space ~
26399 \begin_inset space ~
26403 \begin_inset space ~
26410 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26414 \begin_inset Index idx
26417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26418 Document ! Settings
26426 \begin_inset space ~
26432 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26433 -errors in formulas,
26434 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
26437 \begin_layout Subsection
26439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26441 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26446 \begin_inset Index idx
26449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26450 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26458 \begin_layout Standard
26459 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26460 provides a selection of different formula types.
26462 allows you to choose between
26483 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26484 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26490 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26493 \begin_layout Chapter
26497 \begin_layout Section
26499 \begin_inset Index idx
26502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26511 name "sec:Cross-References"
26518 \begin_layout Standard
26519 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26520 's strengths is cross-references.
26521 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26523 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26524 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26525 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26528 \begin_layout Enumerate
26532 \begin_layout Enumerate
26533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26535 name "enu:Second-item"
26542 \begin_layout Enumerate
26546 \begin_layout Standard
26547 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26549 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26552 or by pressing the toolbar button
26559 A gray label box like this:
26560 \begin_inset Graphics
26561 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
26566 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26568 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26603 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26604 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26620 \begin_layout Standard
26621 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26623 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26626 or the toolbar button
26629 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26633 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26634 \begin_inset Graphics
26635 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26640 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26642 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26655 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26659 \begin_layout Standard
26660 As an alternative to
26662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26665 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26670 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26671 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26673 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26685 \begin_layout Standard
26686 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26687 \begin_inset space ~
26691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26693 reference "enu:Second-item"
26700 \begin_layout Standard
26701 It is recommended to use a protected space
26705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26706 described in section
26707 \begin_inset space ~
26711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26713 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26722 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26723 line breaks between them.
26726 \begin_layout Standard
26727 There are six formats of cross-references:
26730 \begin_layout Description
26731 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26734 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26741 \begin_layout Description
26742 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26743 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26755 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26762 \begin_layout Description
26763 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26764 \begin_inset space ~
26768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26769 LatexCommand pageref
26770 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26777 \begin_layout Description
26779 \begin_inset space ~
26783 \begin_inset space ~
26786 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26788 LatexCommand vpageref
26789 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26794 \begin_inset Newline newline
26797 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26798 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26799 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26800 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26801 it prints “on the next page”.
26802 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26805 \begin_layout Description
26807 \begin_inset space ~
26811 \begin_inset space ~
26815 \begin_inset space ~
26818 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26821 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26826 \begin_inset Newline newline
26829 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26835 ; otherwise it behaves like
26839 \begin_inset space ~
26843 \begin_inset space ~
26852 \begin_layout Description
26854 \begin_inset space ~
26857 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26858 \begin_inset Newline newline
26862 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26870 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26880 \begin_inset Index idx
26883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26885 -packages ! prettyref
26891 \begin_inset Index idx
26894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26896 -packages ! refstyle
26907 \begin_inset Newline newline
26910 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26911 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26914 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26918 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26919 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26927 is the default and preferred because
26931 supports only English documents.
26932 The format is specified by using the command
26944 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26945 preamble of the document.
26946 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26959 ) can be done with this command
26960 \begin_inset Newline newline
26967 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26972 \begin_inset Newline newline
26975 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26977 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26979 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26986 \begin_layout Description
26988 \begin_inset space ~
26991 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26993 LatexCommand nameref
26994 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27001 \begin_layout Standard
27002 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
27003 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27005 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27009 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27013 \begin_layout Standard
27014 You can only use the style
27018 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27022 is always possible.
27025 \begin_layout Standard
27026 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27027 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27029 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27030 \begin_inset space ~
27034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27036 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27043 \begin_layout Standard
27044 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27048 \begin_inset space ~
27052 \begin_inset space ~
27057 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27058 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27061 \begin_inset space ~
27066 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27067 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27070 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27076 \begin_layout Standard
27077 You can change labels at any time.
27078 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27079 do not need to think about this.
27082 \begin_layout Standard
27083 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27085 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27089 \begin_layout Standard
27090 References are described in detail in the section
27091 \begin_inset space ~
27095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27105 \begin_inset space ~
27113 \begin_layout Section
27114 Table of Contents and other Listings
27115 \begin_inset Index idx
27118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27125 \begin_inset Index idx
27128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27144 \begin_layout Subsection
27146 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27148 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27155 \begin_layout Standard
27156 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27158 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27159 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27161 \begin_inset space ~
27165 \begin_inset space ~
27171 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27173 If you click on it, the
27177 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27178 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27179 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27181 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27183 \begin_inset space ~
27188 that is described in section
27189 \begin_inset space ~
27193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27195 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27202 \begin_layout Standard
27203 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27204 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27206 \begin_inset space ~
27210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27212 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27216 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27218 \begin_inset space ~
27222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27224 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27228 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27230 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27233 \begin_layout Subsection
27234 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27235 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27237 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27244 \begin_layout Standard
27245 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27247 You can insert them via the
27249 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27253 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27256 \begin_layout Section
27257 URLs and Hyperlinks
27258 \begin_inset Index idx
27261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27268 \begin_inset Index idx
27271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27280 \begin_layout Subsection
27282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27291 \begin_layout Standard
27292 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
27294 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27300 \begin_layout Standard
27301 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
27303 \begin_inset Flex URL
27306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27316 \begin_layout Standard
27317 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
27323 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
27327 \begin_layout Standard
27328 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27336 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27345 \begin_layout Subsection
27347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27349 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
27356 \begin_layout Standard
27357 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
27359 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27362 or with the toolbar button
27369 The appearing dialog has two fields:
27378 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
27379 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
27380 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27382 name "LyX's homepage"
27383 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27387 , an Email address like this:
27388 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27390 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
27391 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
27396 , or a link to a file.
27399 \begin_layout Standard
27400 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
27402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27413 to the link target.
27416 \begin_layout Standard
27417 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
27418 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
27419 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
27420 the text style dialog.
27421 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
27425 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27427 name "LyX's homepage"
27428 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27435 \begin_layout Standard
27436 The link text color can be changed, when the option
27440 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
27442 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27443 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27447 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
27449 \begin_inset Newline newline
27457 \begin_inset Newline newline
27464 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27467 \begin_layout Section
27469 \begin_inset Index idx
27472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27481 name "sec:Appendices"
27488 \begin_layout Standard
27489 Appendices are created with the menu
27491 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27493 \begin_inset space ~
27497 \begin_inset space ~
27503 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27504 as the appendix part of the book.
27505 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27508 \begin_layout Standard
27509 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27510 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27511 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27512 and the subsection number.
27513 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27517 \begin_layout Standard
27519 \begin_inset space ~
27523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27525 reference "chap:Credits"
27530 \begin_inset space ~
27534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27536 reference "subsec:Export"
27543 \begin_layout Section
27545 \begin_inset Index idx
27548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27557 name "sec:Bibliography"
27564 \begin_layout Standard
27565 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27567 You can include a bibliography database,
27571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27572 Known under the name
27573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27576 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27586 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27587 manually, using the paragraph environment
27591 , which was described in section
27592 \begin_inset space ~
27596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27598 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27603 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27604 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27608 use a bibliography database.
27611 \begin_layout Subsection
27612 The Bibliography Environment
27615 \begin_layout Standard
27620 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27622 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27631 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27633 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27643 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27646 \begin_layout Standard
27647 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27649 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27652 or the toolbar button
27655 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27659 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27660 containing the available citations.
27661 Select one or more keys from the list and
27671 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27672 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27676 \begin_layout Standard
27677 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27678 entry with surrounding brackets.
27683 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27684 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27696 \begin_layout Standard
27700 Companion Second Edition
27703 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27705 key "latexcompanion"
27712 \begin_layout Standard
27713 The \SpecialChar LyX
27714 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27715 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27724 \begin_layout Standard
27725 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27728 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27730 \begin_inset space ~
27738 arg "layout-paragraph"
27742 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27745 \begin_layout Subsection
27746 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27748 \begin_inset Index idx
27751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27752 Bibliography ! Databases
27758 \begin_inset Index idx
27761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27762 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27771 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27778 \begin_layout Standard
27779 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27785 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27787 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27788 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27793 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27795 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27796 your working field in a database.
27797 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27798 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27799 list for that document.
27800 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27804 \begin_layout Standard
27805 The database is a text file with the file extension
27806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27817 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27818 The format is explained in
27819 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27825 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27827 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27829 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27834 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27835 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27836 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27838 \begin_inset Flex URL
27841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27843 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27851 \begin_layout Standard
27852 To use a database, use the menu
27854 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27859 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27872 \begin_inset space ~
27878 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27879 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27886 Add bibliography to TOC
27888 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27893 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27894 in the document or just the cited references.
27897 \begin_layout Standard
27898 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27910 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27911 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27912 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27913 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27915 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27921 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27922 \begin_inset Newline newline
27926 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27928 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27940 \begin_layout Standard
27941 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27944 \begin_layout Standard
27945 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27946 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27948 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27955 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27956 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27961 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27962 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27963 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27978 The following variants are possible:
27981 \begin_layout Description
27982 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27983 with other bibliography packages (e.
27984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27988 \begin_inset space \space{}
27995 ), only with the package
27999 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
28003 \begin_layout Description
28004 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
28005 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
28006 with all bibliography packages, except
28011 \begin_layout Description
28012 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
28017 , works with all bibliography packages
28020 \begin_layout Standard
28021 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28022 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
28024 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
28027 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28031 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28040 \begin_layout Standard
28041 When you select the option
28043 Sectioned bibliography
28047 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28048 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28051 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
28052 This and other options are explained in detail in section
28054 Customizing Bibliographies
28058 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28063 Additional Features
28068 \begin_layout Standard
28069 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
28070 the two methods of creating them.
28071 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28072 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28073 We used the style file
28077 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
28080 \begin_layout Subsection
28081 Bibliography layout
28082 \begin_inset Index idx
28085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28086 Bibliography ! Layout
28094 \begin_layout Standard
28095 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
28096 For this feature you need to enable the option
28102 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28106 \begin_inset Index idx
28109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28110 Document ! Settings
28120 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
28121 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28122 style files as explained in
28123 the previous section.
28126 \begin_layout Standard
28127 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
28128 the citation reference window.
28129 Here is an example where the text
28130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28134 \begin_inset space ~
28138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28141 appears after the reference:
28144 \begin_layout Standard
28146 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28149 key "latexcompanion"
28156 \begin_layout Section
28158 \begin_inset Index idx
28161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28177 \begin_layout Standard
28178 An index entry is created if you use the menu
28180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28182 \begin_inset space ~
28187 or the toolbar button
28194 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
28195 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
28196 by \SpecialChar LyX
28197 as the index entry.
28200 \begin_layout Standard
28201 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
28203 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28204 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28206 \begin_inset space ~
28212 A light blue box labeled
28213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28224 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
28225 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
28229 \begin_layout Standard
28230 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
28231 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
28232 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
28233 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28235 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28237 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
28244 \begin_layout Subsection
28245 Grouping Index Entries
28246 \begin_inset Index idx
28249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28258 \begin_layout Standard
28259 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
28261 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
28262 lists under the entry
28263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28271 First we create the entry
28272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28280 \begin_inset space ~
28284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28286 reference "subsec:Lists"
28291 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
28292 \begin_inset space ~
28296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28298 reference "sec:Itemize"
28302 , we insert the command
28305 \begin_layout Standard
28311 \begin_layout Standard
28315 \begin_layout Standard
28321 \begin_layout Standard
28322 for the enumerated list in section
28323 \begin_inset space ~
28327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28329 reference "sec:Enumerate"
28336 \begin_layout Standard
28337 The exclamation mark
28338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28345 marks the grouping levels.
28346 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
28347 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
28348 If we don't have an index entry for
28349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28356 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
28359 \begin_layout Subsection
28361 \begin_inset Index idx
28364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28365 Index ! Page ranges
28373 \begin_layout Standard
28374 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
28376 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
28377 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
28378 an index entry in section
28379 \begin_inset space ~
28383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28385 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
28392 \begin_layout Standard
28395 Paragraph environments|(
28398 \begin_layout Standard
28399 and another entry at the end of section
28400 \begin_inset space ~
28404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28406 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
28413 \begin_layout Standard
28416 Paragraph environments|)
28419 \begin_layout Standard
28421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28444 respectively start and end the index range.
28445 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
28446 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
28447 the pages of the indexed document parts.
28448 An example is the index entry
28449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28452 Document ! Settings
28453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28459 \begin_layout Subsection
28461 \begin_inset Index idx
28464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28465 Index ! Cross referencing
28473 \begin_layout Standard
28474 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
28475 We referred for example in the index entry
28476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28484 \begin_inset space ~
28488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28490 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28494 ) to the index entry
28495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28502 in the same section using the entry
28505 \begin_layout Standard
28508 GIF|see{Image formats}
28511 \begin_layout Standard
28512 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28514 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28515 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28518 \begin_layout Subsection
28520 \begin_inset Index idx
28523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28524 Index ! Entry order
28532 \begin_layout Standard
28533 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28534 follow the rules for the index order.
28535 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28541 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28543 \begin_inset space ~
28547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28549 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28558 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28559 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28584 \begin_inset Index idx
28587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28588 Dummy entries ! maïs
28594 \begin_inset Index idx
28597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28598 Dummy entries ! maître
28604 \begin_inset Index idx
28607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28608 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28613 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28614 maïs, maison, maître.
28615 To achieve this, we use the command
28618 \begin_layout Standard
28621 previous entry@current entry
28624 \begin_layout Standard
28625 In our case we want to have
28626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28641 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28644 \begin_layout Standard
28650 \begin_layout Standard
28651 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28652 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28654 See the next subsection for an example.
28657 \begin_layout Standard
28658 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28664 \begin_layout Standard
28665 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28670 to generate the index (see sec.
28671 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28677 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28686 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28687 -package aeguill in sec.
28688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28694 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28698 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28699 -packages although all these index
28700 commands start with
28701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28714 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28719 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28722 \begin_layout Standard
28734 \begin_layout Standard
28746 \begin_layout Subsection
28748 \begin_inset Index idx
28751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28752 Index ! Entry layout
28760 \begin_layout Standard
28761 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28762 \begin_inset Index idx
28765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28768 This is an italic dummy entry
28773 You can also format the page number using the character
28774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28781 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28782 -command without a backslash.
28783 We can write for example
28786 \begin_layout Standard
28789 italic page number:|textit
28792 \begin_layout Standard
28793 to get the page number in italic.
28794 \begin_inset Index idx
28797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28798 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28803 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28804 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28822 \begin_inset space ~
28828 Have a look at section
28829 \begin_inset space ~
28833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28835 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28839 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28843 \begin_layout Standard
28844 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28852 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28856 to generate the index, see sec.
28857 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28863 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28872 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28877 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28878 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28881 key "latexcompanion"
28893 \begin_layout Standard
28894 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28896 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28897 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28898 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28899 If so, put the following in the preamble
28902 \begin_layout Standard
28914 \begin_layout Standard
28918 \begin_layout Standard
28924 \begin_layout Standard
28925 in the index entry.
28926 \begin_inset Index idx
28929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28930 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28935 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28936 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28937 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28940 \begin_layout Standard
28941 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28942 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28943 a bold font for all index entries.
28944 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28956 documentation for details,
28957 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28959 key "makeindex,xindy"
28966 \begin_layout Subsection
28968 \begin_inset Index idx
28971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28980 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28987 \begin_layout Standard
28988 If the index generation program
28992 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28993 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28997 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28998 distribution, is used.
29002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29007 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
29008 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
29009 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
29010 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
29011 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
29021 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
29023 dialog, see section
29024 \begin_inset space ~
29028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29030 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29035 The available options are listed and explained in
29036 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29038 key "makeindex,xindy"
29043 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
29047 \begin_layout Standard
29048 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
29049 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
29052 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29053 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29057 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
29058 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
29061 \begin_layout Subsection
29065 \begin_layout Standard
29066 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
29067 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
29068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29075 next to the standard index.
29077 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
29078 that add this feature.
29085 \begin_inset Index idx
29088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29090 -packages ! splitidx
29095 package to generate multiple indexes.
29096 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
29101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29102 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
29104 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29111 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
29112 style, but it also includes
29113 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
29114 Please consult the package's manual for details.
29122 \begin_layout Standard
29123 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
29124 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
29126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29127 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29130 and select the option
29132 Use multiple Indexes
29139 already contains the standard index
29140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29148 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
29149 also appear as a heading) to the
29153 input field and press the
29158 The new index now also appears in the list.
29159 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
29160 label color to the new index.
29163 \begin_layout Standard
29164 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
29167 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29174 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
29175 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
29176 are additional features:
29179 \begin_layout Itemize
29180 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
29181 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
29184 \begin_layout Itemize
29185 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
29186 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
29187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29194 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
29195 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
29196 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
29197 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
29200 \begin_layout Section
29201 Nomenclature/Glossary
29202 \begin_inset Index idx
29205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29212 \begin_inset Index idx
29215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29246 name "sec:Nomenclature"
29253 \begin_layout Standard
29254 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
29255 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
29256 called nomenclature or glossary.
29259 \begin_layout Standard
29260 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29267 \begin_inset Index idx
29270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29272 -packages ! nomencl
29278 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
29280 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29286 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29290 \begin_layout Standard
29291 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
29292 and then use the menu
29294 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29300 \begin_inset space ~
29305 or the toolbar button
29308 arg "nomencl-insert"
29313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29324 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
29327 \begin_layout Standard
29328 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
29329 The first is the term or
29333 that you wish to define.
29338 of the term or symbol.
29341 \begin_layout Standard
29342 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29350 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
29351 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
29359 \begin_layout Subsection
29360 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
29361 \begin_inset Index idx
29364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29365 Nomenclature ! Layout
29373 \begin_layout Standard
29374 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
29378 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
29381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29385 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29393 \begin_inset Newline newline
29401 \begin_inset Newline newline
29407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29414 character starts/ends the formula.
29415 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
29416 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
29418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29428 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
29438 \begin_layout Standard
29439 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29440 -syntax is given in section
29441 \begin_inset space ~
29445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29447 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29454 \begin_layout Standard
29458 \begin_inset space ~
29463 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
29465 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
29466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29470 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29477 in this document is:
29478 \begin_inset Newline newline
29483 dummy entry for the character
29488 \begin_inset Newline newline
29500 \begin_inset space ~
29510 font use the command
29539 \begin_layout Standard
29540 If the characters |
29541 \begin_inset space \space{}
29545 \begin_inset space \space{}
29549 \begin_inset space \space{}
29553 \begin_inset space \space{}
29557 \begin_inset space \space{}
29560 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29561 a quote character in front of them.
29562 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29563 LatexCommand nomenclature
29564 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29565 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29572 \begin_layout Subsection
29573 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29574 \begin_inset Index idx
29577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29578 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29586 \begin_layout Standard
29587 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29588 -code of the symbol
29590 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29592 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29595 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29596 LatexCommand nomenclature
29598 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29605 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29609 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29610 LatexCommand nomenclature
29613 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29618 They will be sorted by
29619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29645 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29648 will be sorted before the
29652 since the character
29653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29660 is considered in sorting.
29663 \begin_layout Standard
29664 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29667 \begin_inset space ~
29672 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29673 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29675 For the example given, you can insert
29679 in this field for the
29680 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29687 will be located before
29688 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29694 \begin_layout Standard
29695 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29700 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29709 \begin_layout Subsection
29710 Nomenclature Options
29711 \begin_inset Index idx
29714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29715 Nomenclature ! Options
29723 \begin_layout Standard
29728 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29729 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29732 \begin_layout Description
29733 refeq Appends the phrase
29734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29749 to every nomenclature entry, where
29755 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29758 \begin_layout Description
29759 refpage Appends the phrase
29760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29775 to every nomenclature entry, where
29781 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29784 \begin_layout Description
29785 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29788 \begin_layout Standard
29789 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29790 class options list in the
29792 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29796 In this document the options
29803 \begin_layout Standard
29804 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29810 \begin_layout Standard
29811 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29812 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29817 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29820 \begin_layout Description
29830 \begin_layout Description
29833 nomrefpage Like the
29840 \begin_layout Description
29843 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29852 \begin_layout Description
29856 \begin_inset space ~
29862 \begin_inset space ~
29867 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29870 \begin_layout Standard
29872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29879 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29880 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29884 \begin_layout Standard
29892 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29895 \begin_inset Newline newline
29902 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29907 \begin_inset Newline newline
29911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29926 by their translation.
29929 \begin_layout Subsection
29930 Printing the Nomenclature
29931 \begin_inset Index idx
29934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29935 Nomenclature ! Printing
29943 \begin_layout Standard
29944 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29946 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29947 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29963 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29964 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29965 You can choose between these settings:
29968 \begin_layout Description
29969 Default a space of 1
29970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29976 \begin_layout Description
29978 \begin_inset space ~
29982 \begin_inset space ~
29985 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29988 \begin_layout Description
29989 Custom custom space
29992 \begin_layout Standard
29993 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30002 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
30010 For example, in order to change the name to
30014 , add the following line to the preamble:
30017 \begin_layout Standard
30025 nomname}{List of Symbols}
30028 \begin_layout Subsection
30029 Nomenclature Program
30030 \begin_inset Index idx
30033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30034 Nomenclature ! Program
30040 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30042 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
30049 \begin_layout Standard
30055 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30056 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
30058 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
30063 by adding options, see section
30064 \begin_inset space ~
30068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30070 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30075 The available options are listed and explained in
30076 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30078 key "nomencl,makeindex"
30085 \begin_layout Section
30087 \begin_inset Index idx
30090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30097 \begin_inset Index idx
30100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30101 Document ! Branches
30107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30109 name "sec:Branches"
30116 \begin_layout Standard
30117 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
30118 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
30119 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
30120 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
30123 \begin_layout Standard
30124 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
30125 allows you to put text into branches.
30126 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
30127 To create a branch, either select the menu
30129 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30130 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
30133 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
30135 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30142 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
30143 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
30144 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
30145 and whether the name of the branch should
30146 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
30147 (see below for an example).
30148 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
30149 to the name of the other) and to add
30150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30162 \begin_inset space ~
30165 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
30166 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
30169 \begin_layout Standard
30170 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
30171 These boxes are inserted via the menu
30173 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30176 where you can choose a branch.
30177 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
30181 \begin_layout Standard
30182 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
30183 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
30186 \begin_layout Standard
30187 \begin_inset Branch Question
30190 \begin_layout Standard
30191 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
30199 \begin_layout Standard
30200 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30203 \begin_layout Standard
30204 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
30212 \begin_layout Standard
30219 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30220 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30223 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
30224 Consider for example a file
30225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30232 which has the above branches.
30234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30241 is active, the PDF export file would be called
30242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30265 branch were inactive,
30266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30281 branch was active, likewise
30282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30297 branch was active, and
30298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30301 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
30302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30305 if both branches were active.
30306 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
30309 \begin_layout Standard
30310 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30316 \begin_layout Standard
30317 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
30318 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
30319 definitions for each branch.
30320 For example you can define for the question branch
30324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30325 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30326 -syntax, see section
30327 \begin_inset space ~
30331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30333 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30345 \begin_layout Standard
30355 \begin_layout Standard
30365 \begin_layout Standard
30366 and for the answer branch
30369 \begin_layout Standard
30379 \begin_layout Standard
30389 \begin_layout Standard
30390 \begin_inset Branch Question
30393 \begin_layout Standard
30397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30425 \begin_layout Standard
30426 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30429 \begin_layout Standard
30433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30461 \begin_layout Standard
30462 Now it is possible to use the
30466 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30473 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30476 commands to obtain conditional output.
30477 Here is an example formula where only the
30484 \begin_inset Formula
30486 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30494 \begin_layout Standard
30495 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30503 \begin_layout Standard
30504 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30510 \begin_inset space \space{}
30513 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30515 For this advanced usage, see the
30520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30523 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30530 \begin_layout Section
30532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30534 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30539 \begin_inset Index idx
30542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30551 \begin_layout Standard
30554 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30555 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30558 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30560 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30566 \begin_inset Index idx
30569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30571 -packages ! hyperref
30576 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30577 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30578 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30579 part of the document.
30583 \begin_layout Standard
30584 The header information in the dialog tab
30588 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30589 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30590 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30591 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30595 \begin_inset space ~
30599 \begin_inset space ~
30604 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30605 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30606 and author entries.
30610 \begin_inset space ~
30614 \begin_inset space ~
30618 \begin_inset space ~
30623 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30626 \begin_layout Standard
30627 You can specify in the dialog tab
30631 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30636 \begin_inset space ~
30640 \begin_inset space ~
30644 \begin_inset space ~
30649 option allows long links to be split;
30652 \begin_inset space ~
30656 \begin_inset space ~
30660 \begin_inset space ~
30668 \begin_inset space ~
30673 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30676 \begin_inset space ~
30681 colors the different links.
30682 The default colors are:
30685 \begin_layout Labeling
30686 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30691 for hyperlinks and URLs
30694 \begin_layout Labeling
30695 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30703 \begin_layout Labeling
30704 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30712 \begin_layout Standard
30713 but you can change these in the field
30718 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30721 \begin_layout Standard
30724 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30727 \begin_layout Standard
30732 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30733 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30734 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30737 \begin_layout Standard
30742 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30743 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30744 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30754 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30755 when opening the PDF.
30757 \begin_inset space ~
30760 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30761 \begin_inset space ~
30764 1 will only display the sections.
30767 \begin_layout Standard
30768 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30769 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30775 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30776 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30785 \begin_layout Section
30787 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30791 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30798 \begin_layout Subsection
30801 \begin_inset Index idx
30804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30812 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30814 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30821 \begin_layout Standard
30822 As \SpecialChar LyX
30823 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30824 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30825 commands and constructs,
30828 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30829 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30830 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30831 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30832 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30833 cannot support all packages and
30837 \begin_layout Standard
30838 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30839 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30840 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30844 Code box is created by the menu
30846 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30859 \begin_inset space ~
30864 or by the toolbar button
30877 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30885 \begin_layout Standard
30886 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30888 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30890 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30891 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30898 , you can write the command part
30904 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30905 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30909 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30910 Code box behind the word.
30911 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30912 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30916 \begin_layout Standard
30917 \begin_inset Graphics
30918 filename clipart/ERT.png
30926 \begin_layout Standard
30930 \begin_layout Standard
30931 This is a line with a
30935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30958 \begin_layout Standard
30959 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30967 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30968 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30969 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30970 know that the command is finished.
30978 \begin_layout Subsection
30979 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30981 \begin_inset Argument 1
30984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30985 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30992 \begin_inset Index idx
30995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31003 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31005 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31012 \begin_layout Standard
31013 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
31014 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31015 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
31016 uses in the background.
31017 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
31018 is based on commands, you can
31019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31027 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
31028 any time if you know the right commands.
31029 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
31030 is the end of the day.
31031 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
31032 all caption labels bold.
31033 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
31035 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
31039 \begin_layout Standard
31040 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
31042 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31044 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31047 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31056 \begin_layout Standard
31057 As result you find that the package
31062 \begin_inset Index idx
31065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31067 -packages ! caption
31073 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
31075 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31078 \SpecialChar menuseparator
31085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31093 \begin_inset space ~
31101 \begin_layout Standard
31106 usepackage[options]{package name}
31109 \begin_layout Standard
31110 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
31111 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
31112 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
31113 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
31116 \begin_layout Standard
31117 In your case the package name is
31122 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
31127 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
31128 So you add the command
31131 \begin_layout Standard
31136 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
31139 \begin_layout Standard
31140 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
31144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31145 For more commands provided by the
31149 package, have a look at its documentation,
31150 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31164 \begin_layout Standard
31165 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
31167 For example if you use a
31171 class, you don't need the package
31175 , you can instead write
31178 \begin_layout Standard
31183 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
31188 \begin_layout Standard
31189 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
31190 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
31191 documentation of the document class you want to use.
31198 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
31201 \begin_layout Standard
31202 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
31203 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
31205 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31206 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
31207 Code box as described in the previous
31211 \begin_layout Standard
31212 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
31213 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31216 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31218 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
31225 \begin_layout Standard
31226 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
31232 \begin_layout Standard
31236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31246 \begin_inset Note Note
31249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31250 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
31258 \begin_layout Left Header
31259 \begin_inset Argument 1
31262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31282 \begin_inset Note Note
31285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31286 defines the header line as described below
31294 \begin_layout Center Header
31295 \begin_inset Argument 1
31298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31307 \begin_layout Right Header
31308 \begin_inset Argument 1
31311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31332 \begin_layout Left Footer
31333 \begin_inset Argument 1
31336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31357 \begin_layout Center Footer
31358 \begin_inset Argument 1
31361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31373 \begin_inset Newline newline
31377 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31383 \begin_layout Right Footer
31384 \begin_inset Argument 1
31387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31409 \begin_layout Section
31410 Customized Page Headers and Footers
31411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31413 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
31418 \begin_inset Index idx
31421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31422 Document ! Header/Footer line
31428 \begin_inset Index idx
31431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31440 \begin_layout Standard
31441 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
31445 \begin_inset space ~
31456 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31462 \begin_inset space ~
31468 As a second step add in the menu
31470 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31471 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31478 Custom Header/Footerlines
31479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31483 This module offers the following 6
31484 \begin_inset space ~
31490 \begin_layout Description
31492 \begin_inset space ~
31496 \begin_inset space ~
31500 \begin_inset space ~
31504 \begin_inset space ~
31508 \begin_inset space ~
31514 \begin_layout Description
31516 \begin_inset space ~
31520 \begin_inset space ~
31524 \begin_inset space ~
31528 \begin_inset space ~
31532 \begin_inset space ~
31538 \begin_layout Standard
31539 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31542 \begin_layout Standard
31543 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31544 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31546 \begin_inset space ~
31550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31552 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31556 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31559 \begin_layout Standard
31560 \begin_inset Float figure
31566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31569 \begin_inset Tabular
31570 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31571 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31572 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31573 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31574 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31576 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31594 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31605 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31623 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31634 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31638 The normal text on the page goes here.
31639 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31641 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31642 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31647 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31656 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31667 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31685 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31696 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31714 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31732 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31737 name "fig:Page-layout"
31741 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31754 \begin_layout Standard
31755 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31763 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31767 \begin_inset space ~
31772 is set to “Default”.
31773 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31782 \begin_layout Subsection
31786 \begin_layout Standard
31787 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31788 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31789 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31790 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31792 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31793 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31796 \begin_layout Standard
31797 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31798 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31802 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31815 \begin_inset space ~
31823 \begin_layout Description
31826 thepage prints the current page number
31829 \begin_layout Description
31832 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31835 \begin_layout Description
31838 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31841 \begin_layout Description
31844 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31845 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31852 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31855 because it usually goes in a left header.
31858 \begin_layout Description
31861 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31862 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31864 It is normally used in the right header.
31867 \begin_layout Subsection
31868 Default header/footer
31871 \begin_layout Standard
31872 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31873 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31874 footer has the page number.
31875 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31876 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31877 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31880 \begin_inset space ~
31888 \begin_layout Subsection
31892 \begin_layout Standard
31893 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31894 Some pages are different.
31895 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31896 a new part or chapter in your book.
31897 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31898 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31899 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31902 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31903 Header and footer decoration line
31906 \begin_layout Standard
31907 By default, you get a 0.4
31908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31911 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31912 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31924 in the following way:
31927 \begin_layout Standard
31934 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31937 \begin_layout Standard
31938 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31947 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31948 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31954 \begin_layout Standard
31955 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31957 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31958 \begin_inset space ~
31962 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31971 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31972 Several header/footer lines
31975 \begin_layout Standard
31976 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31977 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31978 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31980 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31995 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31996 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32009 \begin_inset space ~
32017 \begin_layout Standard
32024 headheight}{height}
32027 \begin_layout Standard
32028 where height is a size in standard units.
32029 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
32030 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
32031 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32032 logfile with the menu
32034 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32052 \begin_inset space ~
32057 to see if you can find a warning about the package
32062 \begin_inset Index idx
32065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32067 -packages ! fancyhdr
32073 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
32074 for your header/footer.
32077 \begin_layout Subsection
32081 \begin_layout Standard
32082 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
32083 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
32084 This example consists of the following definition:
32087 \begin_layout Description
32089 \begin_inset space ~
32098 , empty optional argument
32101 \begin_layout Description
32103 \begin_inset space ~
32106 Header empty, empty optional argument
32109 \begin_layout Description
32111 \begin_inset space ~
32120 in the optional argument
32123 \begin_layout Description
32125 \begin_inset space ~
32134 in the optional argument
32137 \begin_layout Description
32139 \begin_inset space ~
32152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32156 \begin_inset Newline newline
32160 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
32164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32167 in the optional argument
32170 \begin_layout Description
32172 \begin_inset space ~
32181 , empty optional argument
32184 \begin_layout Description
32187 headrulewidth set to 2
32188 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32194 \begin_layout Standard
32195 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
32196 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
32202 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32211 \begin_layout Standard
32212 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
32218 \begin_layout Standard
32222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32226 pagestyle{headings}
32232 \begin_inset Note Note
32235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32236 switches back to page style with the default headings
32244 \begin_layout Section
32245 Previewing Snippets of your Document
32246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32248 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
32253 \begin_inset Index idx
32256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32263 \begin_inset Index idx
32266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32275 \begin_layout Standard
32277 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
32278 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
32279 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
32282 \begin_layout Subsection
32286 \begin_layout Standard
32287 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32293 \begin_inset Index idx
32296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32298 -packages ! preview-latex
32303 (on some systems named simply
32308 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32310 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32316 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32318 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
32326 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
32327 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32328 -package are automatically
32329 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
32333 \begin_layout Subsection
32337 \begin_layout Standard
32338 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32339 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
32341 activate the option
32344 \begin_inset space ~
32351 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32357 \begin_inset space ~
32361 \begin_inset space ~
32364 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
32371 \begin_inset space ~
32384 \begin_inset space ~
32389 is the multiplication factor for the size.
32392 \begin_layout Standard
32393 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
32398 \begin_inset space ~
32406 \begin_inset space ~
32414 \begin_layout Standard
32415 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
32416 and when you finish
32420 \begin_layout Standard
32421 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32429 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
32430 generated by activating the option
32433 \begin_inset space ~
32439 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
32447 \begin_layout Subsection
32448 Selected document parts
32451 \begin_layout Standard
32452 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
32453 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
32454 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
32455 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32457 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
32459 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32463 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
32464 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
32465 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
32468 \begin_layout Standard
32469 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32476 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32488 is explained in section
32490 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32495 \begin_inset space ~
32505 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32506 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32507 the final rotated boxes,
32508 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32509 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32511 Here is the result:
32514 \begin_layout Standard
32515 \begin_inset Preview
32517 \begin_layout Standard
32522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32526 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32532 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32542 height_special "totalheight"
32547 backgroundcolor "none"
32550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32575 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32581 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32603 \begin_layout Standard
32604 Previewing works also for colors.
32605 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32624 is explained in section
32631 \begin_inset space ~
32644 \begin_layout Standard
32645 \begin_inset Preview
32647 \begin_layout Standard
32651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32670 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32675 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32694 \begin_layout Standard
32695 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32701 \begin_layout Standard
32702 If \SpecialChar LyX
32703 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32704 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32705 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32706 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32707 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32708 the \SpecialChar TeX
32710 If \SpecialChar LyX
32711 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32712 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32714 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32715 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32716 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32719 \begin_layout Subsection
32724 \begin_layout Standard
32725 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32726 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32729 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32731 \begin_inset space ~
32736 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32738 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32740 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32741 's main window, then only this selection
32742 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32743 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32744 the source view window.
32749 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32750 ; but note that if you have
32751 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32753 not just the one which is open at the time.
32756 \begin_layout Section
32757 Advanced Find and Replace
32758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32760 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32765 \begin_inset Index idx
32768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32775 \begin_inset Index idx
32778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32787 \begin_layout Subsection
32791 \begin_layout Standard
32792 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32793 allows for searching of complex,
32794 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32796 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32797 The key-features are:
32800 \begin_layout Itemize
32801 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32802 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32803 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32807 \begin_layout Itemize
32808 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32809 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32810 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32811 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32814 \begin_layout Itemize
32815 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32816 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32817 outside of mathematics environments
32820 \begin_layout Itemize
32821 Search may be widened to a specific
32826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32830 \begin_inset space ~
32833 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32834 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32841 \begin_layout Itemize
32842 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32843 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32848 \begin_inset space ~
32851 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32854 \begin_layout Subsection
32858 \begin_layout Standard
32859 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32861 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32874 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32877 ) or the toolbar button
32880 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32886 Advanced Find and Replace
32891 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32895 \begin_layout Standard
32901 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32905 \begin_inset space ~
32910 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32913 arg "paragraph-break"
32917 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32918 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32922 arg "paragraph-break"
32925 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32929 searches backwards.
32932 \begin_layout Standard
32936 \begin_inset space ~
32941 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32950 \begin_inset space ~
32955 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32958 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32959 Searching for mathematics
32962 \begin_layout Standard
32963 Mathematical formulas, such as
32964 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32967 or something more complex like
32968 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32971 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32976 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32977 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32978 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32979 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32985 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32989 \begin_layout Standard
32990 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32991 This is done by switching to the
32995 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
33000 This way, entering in the
33007 \begin_layout Itemize
33008 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
33009 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
33012 \begin_layout Itemize
33013 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
33014 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
33017 \begin_layout Itemize
33018 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
33019 of it only within section headings.
33020 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
33021 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
33025 \begin_layout Itemize
33026 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
33027 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
33030 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33034 \begin_layout Standard
33035 The entries made in the
33039 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
33042 \begin_inset space ~
33048 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
33052 button or alternatively press
33055 arg "paragraph-break"
33062 while the cursor is in the
33065 \begin_inset space ~
33073 \begin_layout Standard
33074 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
33076 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
33080 \begin_layout Itemize
33081 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
33082 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
33083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33090 with its typewriter version
33091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33105 \begin_layout Itemize
33106 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
33108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33112 \begin_inset Formula $R$
33116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33124 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
33128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33131 (you may want to enable the
33134 \begin_inset space ~
33142 \begin_inset space ~
33147 options and disable the
33155 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
33156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33163 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
33164 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
33168 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
33171 , or occurrences of
33172 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
33176 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
33182 \begin_layout Subsection
33186 \begin_layout Standard
33187 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
33191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33192 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
33194 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33196 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
33205 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
33211 This is done with the context menu
33213 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33214 Insert Regular Expression
33216 while the cursor is in the
33221 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
33222 expression matching rules
33226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33227 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
33230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33234 \begin_inset space ~
33237 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
33238 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
33244 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
33245 same text in the document.
33246 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
33247 Examples of using such a feature may be:
33250 \begin_layout Enumerate
33251 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
33256 editor the fraction
33257 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
33261 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
33264 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
33265 fractions with the given denominator.
33268 \begin_layout Enumerate
33269 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
33281 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
33286 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
33287 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
33288 Also, by inserting a
33289 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
33292 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
33293 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
33296 \begin_layout Standard
33297 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
33298 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
33299 \begin_inset Formula $()$
33302 , and referring back to them through
33303 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
33307 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
33311 For example, try searching with the regexp
33312 \begin_inset Newline newline
33315 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
33318 \begin_inset Newline newline
33321 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
33324 \begin_layout Standard
33325 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
33328 \begin_layout Standard
33329 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33337 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
33338 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
33339 sub-expressions is absolute.
33341 \begin_inset space ~
33345 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
33348 always refers to the first occurrence of
33349 \begin_inset Formula $()$
33352 in all entered regexps.
33360 \begin_layout Section
33362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33364 name "sec:Spellchecking"
33369 \begin_inset Index idx
33372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33381 \begin_layout Standard
33383 has a built-in spell checker.
33386 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33393 key or the toolbar button
33396 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
33399 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
33400 beginning of the currently selected text.
33401 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
33402 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
33403 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
33404 scrolled so that it is visible.
33405 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
33406 n, if any could be found.
33407 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
33411 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
33412 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
33415 \begin_layout Standard
33416 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
33419 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33423 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
33424 a different one at the top of the dialog.
33426 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
33427 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
33430 \begin_inset space ~
33438 arg "dialog-show character"
33441 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
33443 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
33446 \begin_layout Standard
33447 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
33448 can be downloaded from here:
33449 \begin_inset Newline newline
33453 \begin_inset Flex URL
33456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33458 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
33464 \begin_inset Newline newline
33468 \begin_inset space ~
33471 files for each language.
33472 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
33473 \begin_inset space ~
33476 files into \SpecialChar LyX
33477 's installation subfolder
33485 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33487 \begin_inset Newline newline
33490 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
33491 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
33492 but in most cases these are
33508 is the language code.
33511 \begin_layout Subsection
33515 \begin_layout Standard
33518 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33519 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33521 \begin_inset space ~
33524 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33527 you can set the following things:
33530 \begin_layout Description
33532 \begin_inset space ~
33535 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33536 should use for spell checking.
33537 Depending on your platform,
33551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33552 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33553 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33568 \begin_layout Description
33570 \begin_inset space ~
33573 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33574 will always use the given language
33575 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33578 \begin_layout Description
33580 \begin_inset space ~
33583 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33585 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33589 \begin_inset space \space{}
33593 This should normally not be needed.
33596 \begin_layout Description
33598 \begin_inset space ~
33602 \begin_inset space ~
33605 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33617 \begin_layout Description
33619 \begin_inset space ~
33622 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33623 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33624 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33625 appear in a context menu.
33626 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33630 \begin_layout Description
33632 \begin_inset space ~
33636 \begin_inset space ~
33640 \begin_inset space ~
33643 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33647 \begin_layout Section
33649 \begin_inset Index idx
33652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33661 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33668 \begin_layout Standard
33670 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33671 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33681 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33683 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33692 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33694 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33695 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33696 which are available for many languages.
33699 \begin_layout Standard
33700 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33701 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33705 \begin_layout Subsection
33706 Setting up the thesaurus
33709 \begin_layout Standard
33718 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33722 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33727 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33733 \begin_inset space ~
33741 For instance, the US English files are named:
33744 \begin_layout Itemize
33748 \begin_layout Itemize
33752 \begin_layout Standard
33761 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33762 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33765 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33766 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33767 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33769 \begin_inset space ~
33774 ) to the path where they are installed.
33778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33779 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33780 ies, typical locations are
33786 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33790 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33794 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33797 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33803 LibreOffice-<Version>
33810 On the Mac, the default location is
33812 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33813 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33814 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33815 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33816 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33817 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33825 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33826 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33827 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33831 \begin_layout Standard
33832 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33833 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33837 \begin_layout Itemize
33838 \begin_inset Flex URL
33841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33843 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33851 \begin_layout Standard
33852 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33853 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33855 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33856 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33857 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33859 \begin_inset space ~
33864 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33866 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33867 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33871 \begin_layout Standard
33872 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33874 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33877 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33883 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33886 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33887 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33889 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33895 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33896 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33897 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33899 \begin_inset space ~
33904 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33907 \begin_layout Subsection
33908 Using the thesaurus
33911 \begin_layout Standard
33912 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33914 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33917 or the toolbar button
33920 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33923 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33925 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33927 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33928 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33929 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33938 ), related terms (such as
33941 \begin_inset space ~
33950 ), compounds (such as
33953 \begin_inset space ~
33962 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33971 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33974 \begin_layout Standard
33975 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33976 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33980 \begin_layout Standard
33981 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33982 the dictionary, such as the above
33986 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33991 \begin_inset space \space{}
33994 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33995 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33996 For example, looking up the word form
34000 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
34005 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
34006 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34010 \begin_inset space \space{}
34021 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
34022 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
34023 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
34026 \begin_layout Section
34028 \begin_inset Index idx
34031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34038 \begin_inset Index idx
34041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34042 Document ! Change Tracking
34048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34050 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
34057 \begin_layout Standard
34058 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
34059 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
34060 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
34061 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
34063 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34065 \begin_inset space ~
34068 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34070 \begin_inset space ~
34078 \begin_layout Standard
34079 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
34093 The color depends on the author that made the change.
34094 You can change the color in
34096 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34097 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34099 \begin_inset space ~
34103 \begin_inset space ~
34108 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34114 \begin_inset Index idx
34117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34118 Color ! Change tracking
34123 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
34124 's status bar when the
34125 cursor is in changed text.
34126 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
34129 arg "changes-merge"
34135 \begin_layout Standard
34136 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
34138 \begin_inset Index idx
34141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34150 \begin_layout Standard
34151 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34157 \begin_layout Standard
34158 \begin_inset Graphics
34159 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
34167 \begin_layout Standard
34168 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34174 \begin_layout Standard
34175 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
34178 \begin_layout Standard
34179 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34185 \begin_layout Standard
34186 \begin_inset Tabular
34187 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
34188 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
34189 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
34190 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
34191 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34200 arg "changes-track"
34208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34214 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34216 \begin_inset space ~
34219 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34221 \begin_inset space ~
34230 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34239 arg "changes-output"
34247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34253 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34255 \begin_inset space ~
34258 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34260 \begin_inset space ~
34264 \begin_inset space ~
34268 \begin_inset space ~
34277 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34298 Jumps to the next change
34304 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34313 arg "change-accept"
34321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34327 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34329 \begin_inset space ~
34332 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34334 \begin_inset space ~
34343 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34352 arg "change-reject"
34360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34366 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34368 \begin_inset space ~
34371 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34373 \begin_inset space ~
34382 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34391 arg "changes-merge"
34399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34405 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34407 \begin_inset space ~
34410 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34412 \begin_inset space ~
34421 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34430 arg "all-changes-accept"
34438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34444 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34446 \begin_inset space ~
34449 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34451 \begin_inset space ~
34455 \begin_inset space ~
34464 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34473 arg "all-changes-reject"
34481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34487 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34489 \begin_inset space ~
34492 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34494 \begin_inset space ~
34498 \begin_inset space ~
34507 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34530 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34531 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34544 \begin_inset space ~
34553 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34576 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34578 \begin_inset space ~
34594 \begin_layout Standard
34595 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34601 \begin_layout Standard
34602 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34622 \begin_layout Standard
34623 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34624 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34625 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34626 the next change after the current cursor position.
34627 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34628 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34629 step to the next change.
34630 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34633 \begin_layout Standard
34634 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34635 to describe a change.
34638 \begin_layout Standard
34639 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34645 \begin_inset Index idx
34648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34650 -packages ! dvipost
34656 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34658 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34664 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34668 \begin_layout Section
34669 Comparison of Documents
34670 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34672 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34677 \begin_inset Index idx
34680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34681 Comparison of documents
34689 \begin_layout Standard
34690 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34693 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34697 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34698 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34700 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34702 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34706 \begin_inset space ~
34710 \begin_inset space ~
34714 \begin_inset space ~
34723 \begin_inset space ~
34727 \begin_inset space ~
34731 \begin_inset space ~
34735 \begin_inset space ~
34739 \begin_inset space ~
34743 \begin_inset space ~
34748 enables the change tracking option
34751 \begin_inset space ~
34755 \begin_inset space ~
34759 \begin_inset space ~
34764 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34767 \begin_layout Section
34768 International Support
34769 \begin_inset Index idx
34772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34773 International support
34781 \begin_layout Standard
34782 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34783 with any language you want.
34784 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34785 up \SpecialChar LyX
34787 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34789 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34796 \begin_layout Standard
34797 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34798 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34799 \begin_inset space ~
34803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34805 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34812 \begin_layout Subsection
34814 \begin_inset Index idx
34817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34824 \begin_inset Index idx
34827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34828 Document ! Settings
34834 \begin_inset Index idx
34837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34838 Document ! Language
34846 \begin_layout Standard
34849 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34850 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34853 dialog lets you set
34855 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34860 \begin_layout Standard
34865 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34870 \begin_inset space ~
34875 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34876 For details about the different encoding options see section
34877 \begin_inset space ~
34881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34883 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34890 \begin_layout Subsection
34891 Keyboard mapping configuration
34892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34894 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34901 \begin_layout Standard
34902 If you have for example a U.
34903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34906 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34907 can use an alternate keymap.
34908 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34913 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34914 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34915 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34918 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34919 \begin_inset space ~
34923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34925 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34930 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34931 which one you want to use.
34934 \begin_layout Standard
34935 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34936 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34937 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34941 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34942 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34943 one to support the characters you want.
34944 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34951 \begin_layout Chapter
34954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34956 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34963 \begin_layout Standard
34964 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34965 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34966 topic inside the user's guide.
34969 \begin_layout Section
34971 \begin_inset Index idx
34974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34983 \begin_layout Standard
34988 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34991 \begin_layout Subsection
34995 \begin_layout Standard
34996 Creates a new document.
34999 \begin_layout Subsection
35003 \begin_layout Standard
35004 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
35005 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
35006 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
35009 \begin_layout Subsection
35013 \begin_layout Standard
35017 \begin_layout Subsection
35021 \begin_layout Standard
35022 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
35023 Click there on a file to open it.
35026 \begin_layout Subsection
35030 \begin_layout Standard
35031 Closes the current document.
35034 \begin_layout Subsection
35038 \begin_layout Standard
35039 Closes all opened documents.
35042 \begin_layout Subsection
35046 \begin_layout Standard
35047 Saves the actual document.
35050 \begin_layout Subsection
35054 \begin_layout Standard
35055 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
35058 \begin_layout Subsection
35062 \begin_layout Standard
35063 Saves all opened documents.
35066 \begin_layout Subsection
35070 \begin_layout Standard
35071 Reloads the actual document from disk.
35074 \begin_layout Subsection
35078 \begin_layout Standard
35079 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
35080 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
35081 It is described in the section
35083 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
35088 Additional Features
35093 \begin_layout Subsection
35097 \begin_layout Standard
35098 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
35099 -versions, HTML-files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
35100 -files, NoWeb-files,
35101 plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
35102 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
35106 \begin_layout Standard
35107 When using the menu entry
35110 \begin_inset space ~
35115 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
35119 \begin_inset space ~
35123 \begin_inset space ~
35127 \begin_inset space ~
35132 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
35133 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
35136 \begin_layout Subsection
35138 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35140 name "subsec:Export"
35147 \begin_layout Standard
35148 You can export your document to various file formats.
35149 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
35151 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
35152 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
35153 during its configuration.
35156 \begin_layout Standard
35157 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
35159 \begin_inset space ~
35163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35165 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
35172 \begin_layout Description
35178 \begin_inset space ~
35185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35192 yX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
35194 \begin_inset space ~
35197 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
35198 \begin_inset Newline newline
35201 Since \SpecialChar LyX
35202 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
35206 \begin_layout Description
35207 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
35213 \begin_layout Description
35215 \begin_inset space ~
35218 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
35224 \begin_layout Description
35225 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
35226 's native DVI-format.
35227 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
35228 files paths or file names in your document.
35230 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
35237 \begin_layout Description
35238 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
35239 in files paths or file names
35242 \begin_layout Description
35244 \begin_inset space ~
35251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35258 eX) DVI-format using the program
35260 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35263 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
35267 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35275 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
35283 \begin_layout Description
35285 \begin_inset space ~
35288 (cropped) the same as
35292 but with cropped page margins.
35295 \begin_layout Description
35297 \begin_inset space ~
35300 Dot text file with code in the programming language
35304 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
35309 \begin_layout Description
35313 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35321 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
35329 \begin_layout Description
35331 \begin_inset space ~
35335 \begin_inset space ~
35338 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
35342 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
35350 \begin_layout Description
35357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35365 \begin_inset space ~
35376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35389 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35390 source that is compilable with the program
35392 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35396 \begin_layout Description
35403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35411 \begin_inset space ~
35416 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35417 source, additionally all images used in the document
35418 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
35422 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
35425 \begin_layout Description
35432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35440 \begin_inset space ~
35445 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35446 source code, additionally all images used in the document
35447 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
35455 \begin_layout Description
35462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35470 \begin_inset space ~
35481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35494 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35495 source that is compilable with the program
35501 \begin_layout Description
35503 \begin_inset space ~
35507 \begin_inset space ~
35516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35526 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35527 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
35533 \begin_layout Description
35540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35550 \begin_inset space ~
35553 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
35554 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
35556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35560 \begin_inset space \space{}
35565 \begin_inset space ~
35569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35584 represent the version number)
35587 \begin_layout Description
35594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35604 \begin_inset space ~
35608 \begin_inset space ~
35611 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
35612 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
35613 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35617 \begin_layout Description
35624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35633 yXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
35634 's internal XHTML engine
35637 \begin_layout Description
35638 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35643 \begin_layout Description
35644 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
35646 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35649 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
35653 \begin_layout Description
35655 \begin_inset space ~
35658 (cropped) the same as
35661 \begin_inset space ~
35666 but with cropped page margins
35669 \begin_layout Description
35673 \begin_inset space ~
35678 PDF-format using the program
35682 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35685 \begin_layout Description
35689 \begin_inset space ~
35693 \begin_inset space ~
35701 \begin_inset space ~
35706 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35711 \begin_inset space \space{}
35714 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35718 \begin_layout Description
35722 \begin_inset space ~
35729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35738 PDF-format using the program
35740 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35743 , produces PDF-files directly
35746 \begin_layout Description
35750 \begin_inset space ~
35755 PDF-format using the program
35759 , produces PDF-files directly
35762 \begin_layout Description
35766 \begin_inset space ~
35771 PDF-format using the program
35775 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35778 \begin_layout Description
35782 \begin_inset space ~
35789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35798 PDF-format using the program
35803 , produces PDF-files directly
35806 \begin_layout Description
35810 \begin_inset space ~
35818 \begin_layout Description
35822 \begin_inset space ~
35826 \begin_inset space ~
35831 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35832 and then exported as text using the program
35837 \begin_layout Description
35842 PostScript format using the program
35847 \begin_layout Description
35848 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35849 source and also code in the statistical programming
35863 it is possible to use
35867 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35871 \begin_layout Standard
35872 If one of the menu entries
35879 \begin_inset space ~
35888 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35890 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35892 \begin_inset space ~
35896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35898 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35903 \begin_inset Index idx
35906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35907 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35916 \begin_layout Subsection
35920 \begin_layout Standard
35921 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35922 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35925 \begin_inset space ~
35929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35931 reference "sec:Paths"
35936 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35945 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35946 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35947 's preferences as described in section
35948 \begin_inset space ~
35952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35954 reference "subsec:Converters"
35961 \begin_layout Subsection
35962 New and Close Window
35965 \begin_layout Standard
35966 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35970 \begin_layout Subsection
35974 \begin_layout Standard
35975 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35978 \begin_layout Section
35980 \begin_inset Index idx
35983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35992 \begin_layout Subsection
35996 \begin_layout Standard
35997 Described in section
35998 \begin_inset space ~
36002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36004 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
36011 \begin_layout Subsection
36012 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
36015 \begin_layout Standard
36016 Described in section
36017 \begin_inset space ~
36021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36023 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
36030 \begin_layout Subsection
36034 \begin_layout Standard
36035 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
36036 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
36039 \begin_layout Subsection
36043 \begin_layout Standard
36044 Selects the whole document.
36047 \begin_layout Subsection
36048 Find & Replace (Quick)
36051 \begin_layout Standard
36052 Described in section
36053 \begin_inset space ~
36057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36059 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
36066 \begin_layout Subsection
36067 Find & Replace (Advanced)
36070 \begin_layout Standard
36071 Described in section
36072 \begin_inset space ~
36076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36078 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
36085 \begin_layout Subsection
36086 Move Paragraph Up/Down
36089 \begin_layout Standard
36090 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
36094 \begin_layout Subsection
36098 \begin_layout Standard
36099 Described in section
36100 \begin_inset space ~
36104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36106 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
36113 \begin_layout Subsection
36115 \begin_inset Index idx
36118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36119 Paragraph ! Settings
36127 \begin_layout Standard
36128 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
36129 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
36133 \begin_layout Standard
36134 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
36135 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
36141 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36142 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36144 \begin_inset space ~
36152 \begin_layout Subsection
36156 \begin_layout Standard
36157 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
36158 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
36159 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
36163 \begin_layout Standard
36164 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
36166 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
36167 The properties of tables are described in section
36168 \begin_inset space ~
36172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36174 reference "sec:Tables"
36178 , the properties of formulas in chapter
36179 \begin_inset space ~
36183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36185 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36192 \begin_layout Subsection
36193 Increase/Decrease List Depth
36196 \begin_layout Standard
36197 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
36199 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
36200 \begin_inset space ~
36204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36206 reference "sec:Nesting"
36211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36213 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
36220 \begin_layout Subsection
36223 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
36226 \begin_layout Standard
36227 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
36228 nts of the same type.
36230 \begin_inset space ~
36234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36236 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
36240 for an explanation.
36243 \begin_layout Section
36245 \begin_inset Index idx
36248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36257 \begin_layout Standard
36258 At the bottom of the
36262 menu the opened documents are listed.
36265 \begin_layout Subsection
36266 Open/Close all Insets
36269 \begin_layout Standard
36270 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
36273 \begin_layout Subsection
36274 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
36277 \begin_layout Standard
36278 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
36281 \begin_layout Standard
36282 Math macros are described in the
36289 \begin_layout Subsection
36293 \begin_layout Standard
36294 Shows the outline window as described in sections
36295 \begin_inset space ~
36299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36301 reference "sec:Navigating"
36306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36308 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
36315 \begin_layout Subsection
36319 \begin_layout Standard
36320 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
36322 \begin_inset space ~
36326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36328 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36335 \begin_layout Subsection
36339 \begin_layout Standard
36340 Opens a window showing console messages.
36341 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
36343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36346 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
36347 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
36348 is processing the document.
36351 \begin_layout Subsection
36353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36355 name "subsec:Toolbars"
36360 \begin_inset Index idx
36363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36372 \begin_layout Standard
36373 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
36374 All toolbars and the
36377 \begin_inset space ~
36382 can be turned on and off.
36387 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
36399 \begin_inset space ~
36411 \begin_inset space ~
36416 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
36420 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
36427 \begin_layout Standard
36432 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
36436 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
36437 or when a certain feature is enabled.
36438 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
36439 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
36440 is inside a formula or table respectively.
36443 \begin_layout Standard
36445 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
36446 \begin_inset space ~
36450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36452 reference "sec:Toolbars"
36459 \begin_layout Subsection
36463 \begin_layout Standard
36467 \begin_inset space ~
36471 \begin_inset space ~
36475 \begin_inset space ~
36479 \begin_inset space ~
36483 \begin_inset space ~
36487 \begin_inset space ~
36492 will split \SpecialChar LyX
36493 's main window vertically while
36496 \begin_inset space ~
36500 \begin_inset space ~
36504 \begin_inset space ~
36508 \begin_inset space ~
36512 \begin_inset space ~
36516 \begin_inset space ~
36521 will split it horizontally.
36522 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
36523 to view the same document, but at different positions.
36524 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
36525 three or more documents at the same time.
36526 To close a split view, use the menu
36529 \begin_inset space ~
36533 \begin_inset space ~
36541 \begin_layout Subsection
36545 \begin_layout Standard
36546 Closes a split view.
36549 \begin_layout Subsection
36553 \begin_layout Standard
36554 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
36555 so that you will see nothing but your text.
36556 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
36557 's main window fullscreen.
36558 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
36559 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
36562 \begin_layout Section
36564 \begin_inset Index idx
36567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36576 \begin_layout Subsection
36580 \begin_layout Standard
36581 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
36582 \begin_inset space ~
36586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36588 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36599 \begin_layout Subsection
36601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36603 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36610 \begin_layout Standard
36611 Here you can insert the following characters:
36614 \begin_layout Description
36619 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36622 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36623 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36624 -packages you have installed.
36625 You can get a complete display by checking
36628 \begin_inset space ~
36634 \begin_inset Newline newline
36638 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36646 Not all characters will be visible in the
36650 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36658 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36662 ) can display every character.
36670 \begin_layout Description
36671 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36675 \begin_layout Description
36677 \begin_inset space ~
36681 \begin_inset space ~
36684 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36685 \begin_inset space ~
36689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36691 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36698 \begin_layout Description
36700 \begin_inset space ~
36703 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36706 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36707 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36713 \begin_layout Description
36715 \begin_inset space ~
36718 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36721 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36722 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36728 \begin_layout Description
36730 \begin_inset space ~
36733 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36737 \begin_layout Description
36739 \begin_inset space ~
36742 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36746 \begin_layout Description
36748 \begin_inset space ~
36751 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36757 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36763 \begin_layout Description
36765 \begin_inset space ~
36768 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36772 \begin_layout Description
36774 \begin_inset space ~
36778 \begin_inset Index idx
36781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36788 \begin_inset Index idx
36791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36792 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36797 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36798 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36800 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36806 \begin_inset Index idx
36809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36817 \begin_inset Newline newline
36820 More information about this feature can be found in the
36826 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36832 \begin_layout Subsection
36836 \begin_layout Standard
36837 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36840 \begin_layout Description
36841 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36842 \begin_inset script superscript
36844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36853 \begin_layout Description
36854 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36855 \begin_inset script subscript
36857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36866 \begin_layout Description
36868 \begin_inset space ~
36871 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36872 \begin_inset space ~
36876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36878 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36885 \begin_layout Description
36887 \begin_inset space ~
36890 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36891 \begin_inset space ~
36895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36897 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36904 \begin_layout Description
36906 \begin_inset space ~
36909 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36910 \begin_inset space ~
36914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36916 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36923 \begin_layout Description
36925 \begin_inset space ~
36928 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36930 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36934 \begin_inset space \space{}
36937 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36938 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36947 To insert a fraction use the command
36952 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36956 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36965 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36972 \begin_layout Description
36974 \begin_inset space ~
36977 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36978 \begin_inset space ~
36982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36984 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36991 \begin_layout Description
36993 \begin_inset space ~
36996 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36997 \begin_inset space ~
37001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37003 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
37010 \begin_layout Description
37012 \begin_inset space ~
37015 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
37016 \begin_inset space ~
37020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37022 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
37029 \begin_layout Description
37030 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
37031 \begin_inset space ~
37035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37037 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
37044 \begin_layout Description
37046 \begin_inset space ~
37049 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
37050 \begin_inset space ~
37054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37056 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
37063 \begin_layout Description
37065 \begin_inset space ~
37068 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
37069 \begin_inset space ~
37073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37075 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
37082 \begin_layout Description
37084 \begin_inset space ~
37088 \begin_inset space ~
37091 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
37092 \begin_inset space ~
37096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37098 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
37105 \begin_layout Description
37107 \begin_inset space ~
37110 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
37111 as described in section
37112 \begin_inset space ~
37116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37118 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
37125 \begin_layout Description
37127 \begin_inset space ~
37130 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
37131 \begin_inset space ~
37135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37137 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
37144 \begin_layout Description
37146 \begin_inset space ~
37149 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
37150 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
37152 \begin_inset space ~
37156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37158 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
37165 \begin_layout Description
37167 \begin_inset space ~
37170 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
37171 \begin_inset space ~
37175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37177 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
37184 \begin_layout Description
37186 \begin_inset space ~
37190 \begin_inset space ~
37193 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
37194 \begin_inset space ~
37198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37200 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
37207 \begin_layout Subsection
37211 \begin_layout Standard
37212 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
37216 \begin_inset space ~
37237 are described in section
37238 \begin_inset space ~
37242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37244 reference "sec:toc"
37253 is described in section
37254 \begin_inset space ~
37258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37260 reference "sec:Index"
37268 is described in section
37269 \begin_inset space ~
37273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37275 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37281 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37284 is described in section
37285 \begin_inset space ~
37289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37291 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
37298 \begin_layout Subsection
37302 \begin_layout Standard
37303 To insert floats, as described in section
37304 \begin_inset space ~
37308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37310 reference "sec:Floats"
37314 and in detail the chapter
37321 \begin_inset space ~
37329 \begin_layout Subsection
37333 \begin_layout Standard
37334 To insert notes, described in section
37335 \begin_inset space ~
37339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37341 reference "sec:Notes"
37348 \begin_layout Subsection
37352 \begin_layout Standard
37353 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
37355 Branches are described in section
37356 \begin_inset space ~
37360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37362 reference "sec:Branches"
37369 \begin_layout Subsection
37373 \begin_layout Standard
37374 Inserts document class-specific insets.
37375 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
37377 An example is the document class
37378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37385 with three custom insets.
37388 Flex insets and InsetLayout
37392 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
37398 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
37401 \begin_layout Subsection
37403 \begin_inset Index idx
37406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37415 \begin_layout Standard
37416 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
37418 For more information see chapter
37420 External Document Parts
37423 \begin_inset space ~
37429 \begin_layout Subsection
37431 \begin_inset Index idx
37434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37443 \begin_layout Standard
37444 Inserts a box in a certain style.
37445 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
37452 \begin_inset space ~
37460 \begin_layout Subsection
37464 \begin_layout Standard
37469 dialog as described in section
37470 \begin_inset space ~
37474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37476 reference "sec:Bibliography"
37483 \begin_layout Subsection
37487 \begin_layout Standard
37492 as described in section
37493 \begin_inset space ~
37497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37499 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37506 \begin_layout Subsection
37510 \begin_layout Standard
37515 as described in section
37516 \begin_inset space ~
37520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37522 reference "sec:Cross-References"
37529 \begin_layout Subsection
37531 \begin_inset Index idx
37534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37541 \begin_inset Index idx
37544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37545 Longtables ! Caption
37553 \begin_layout Standard
37554 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
37555 Floats are described in section
37556 \begin_inset space ~
37560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37562 reference "sec:Floats"
37566 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
37573 \begin_inset space ~
37581 \begin_layout Subsection
37585 \begin_layout Standard
37586 Inserts an index entry as described in section
37587 \begin_inset space ~
37591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37593 reference "sec:Index"
37600 \begin_layout Subsection
37604 \begin_layout Standard
37605 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37606 \begin_inset space ~
37610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37612 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37619 \begin_layout Subsection
37623 \begin_layout Standard
37624 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37625 Tables are described in section
37626 \begin_inset space ~
37630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37632 reference "sec:Tables"
37636 and in detail in the chapter
37643 \begin_inset space ~
37651 \begin_layout Subsection
37655 \begin_layout Standard
37661 Graphics are described in section
37662 \begin_inset space ~
37666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37668 reference "sec:Graphics"
37675 \begin_layout Subsection
37679 \begin_layout Standard
37680 Inserts a URL as described in section
37681 \begin_inset space ~
37685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37687 reference "subsec:URLs"
37694 \begin_layout Subsection
37698 \begin_layout Standard
37699 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37700 \begin_inset space ~
37704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37706 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37713 \begin_layout Subsection
37717 \begin_layout Standard
37718 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37719 \begin_inset space ~
37723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37725 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37732 \begin_layout Subsection
37736 \begin_layout Standard
37737 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37738 \begin_inset space ~
37742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37744 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37751 \begin_layout Subsection
37755 \begin_layout Standard
37756 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37757 title or caption of a float.
37758 Inserts a short title as described in section
37759 \begin_inset space ~
37763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37765 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37772 \begin_layout Subsection
37777 \begin_layout Standard
37778 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37779 Code box as described in section
37780 \begin_inset space ~
37784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37786 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37793 \begin_layout Subsection
37795 \begin_inset Index idx
37798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37807 \begin_layout Standard
37808 Inserts a program listings box.
37809 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37811 Program Code Listings
37816 \begin_inset space ~
37824 \begin_layout Subsection
37828 \begin_layout Standard
37829 Inserts the actual date.
37830 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37834 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37842 \begin_inset space ~
37850 \begin_layout Subsection
37854 \begin_layout Standard
37855 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37856 \begin_inset space ~
37860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37862 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37869 \begin_layout Section
37871 \begin_inset Index idx
37874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37883 \begin_layout Standard
37884 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37885 \begin_inset space ~
37888 of the current document.
37889 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37892 \begin_layout Subsection
37896 \begin_layout Standard
37897 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37898 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37899 to jump, for example, between section
37900 \begin_inset space ~
37904 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37905 \begin_inset space ~
37908 2.5 and use the submenu
37911 \begin_inset space ~
37915 \begin_inset space ~
37922 \begin_inset space ~
37928 \begin_inset space ~
37932 \begin_inset space ~
37938 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37942 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37948 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37951 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37954 \begin_layout Standard
37955 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37959 \begin_inset space ~
37964 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37967 \begin_inset space ~
37972 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37975 \begin_layout Subsection
37976 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37979 \begin_layout Standard
37980 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37984 \begin_layout Subsection
37988 \begin_layout Standard
37989 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37990 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37991 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37995 \begin_inset space ~
37999 \begin_inset space ~
38007 \begin_layout Subsection
38011 \begin_layout Standard
38012 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
38015 The \SpecialChar LyX
38016 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
38018 \begin_inset space ~
38026 \begin_inset space ~
38031 manual for a detailed description.
38034 \begin_layout Section
38036 \begin_inset Index idx
38039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38048 \begin_layout Subsection
38052 \begin_layout Standard
38053 Change Tracking is described in section
38054 \begin_inset space ~
38058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38060 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
38067 \begin_layout Subsection
38072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38082 \begin_layout Standard
38083 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
38084 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
38085 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38087 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
38088 to the clipboard or update the view.
38089 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38093 \begin_layout Subsection
38094 Start Appendix Here
38097 \begin_layout Standard
38098 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
38099 as described in section
38100 \begin_inset space ~
38104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38106 reference "sec:Appendices"
38113 \begin_layout Subsection
38115 \begin_inset space ~
38121 \begin_layout Standard
38122 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
38123 default output format for the document (menu
38125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38127 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38129 \begin_inset space ~
38133 \begin_inset space ~
38139 \begin_inset space ~
38143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38145 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38149 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
38152 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38153 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38155 \begin_inset space ~
38158 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38160 \begin_inset space ~
38163 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38165 \begin_inset space ~
38169 \begin_inset space ~
38175 \begin_inset space ~
38179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38181 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38185 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
38186 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
38188 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38189 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38191 \begin_inset space ~
38194 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38196 \begin_inset space ~
38199 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38203 \begin_inset space ~
38207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38209 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38214 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
38215 when it is first configured.
38216 The default output format is
38219 \begin_inset space ~
38227 \begin_layout Subsection
38228 View (Other Formats)
38231 \begin_layout Standard
38232 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
38233 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
38234 actual document with an external program.
38235 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
38236 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38237 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
38239 All possible formats are listed in section
38240 \begin_inset space ~
38244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38246 reference "subsec:Export"
38251 You should at least see the menu entry
38256 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38258 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
38260 \begin_inset space ~
38264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38266 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38271 \begin_inset Index idx
38274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38275 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38284 \begin_layout Standard
38285 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
38286 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
38288 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38289 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38291 \begin_inset space ~
38294 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38296 \begin_inset space ~
38299 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38303 \begin_inset space ~
38307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38309 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38314 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
38315 when it is first configured.
38318 \begin_layout Subsection
38320 \begin_inset space ~
38326 \begin_layout Standard
38327 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
38328 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
38331 \begin_layout Subsection
38332 Update (Other Formats)
38335 \begin_layout Standard
38336 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
38337 your document without opening a new viewer window.
38340 \begin_layout Subsection
38341 View Master Document
38344 \begin_layout Standard
38345 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
38347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38361 \begin_inset space ~
38366 manual for more information on this topic).
38367 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
38368 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
38372 \begin_inset space ~
38376 \begin_inset space ~
38381 generates the output of the whole book, while
38385 will just output the chapter alone.
38388 \begin_layout Standard
38389 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
38390 in the document settings (menu
38392 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38393 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38394 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38396 \begin_inset space ~
38400 \begin_inset space ~
38406 \begin_inset space ~
38410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38412 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38416 ) or in the preferences (menu
38418 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38419 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38421 \begin_inset space ~
38424 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38426 \begin_inset space ~
38429 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38431 \begin_inset space ~
38435 \begin_inset space ~
38441 \begin_inset space ~
38445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38447 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38454 \begin_layout Subsection
38455 Update Master Document
38458 \begin_layout Standard
38459 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
38461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38475 \begin_inset space ~
38480 manual for more information on this topic).
38481 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
38482 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
38485 \begin_layout Standard
38486 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
38487 in the document settings (menu
38489 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38490 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38491 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
38493 \begin_inset space ~
38497 \begin_inset space ~
38503 \begin_inset space ~
38507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38509 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
38513 ) or in the preferences (menu
38515 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38516 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38518 \begin_inset space ~
38521 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
38523 \begin_inset space ~
38526 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
38528 \begin_inset space ~
38532 \begin_inset space ~
38538 \begin_inset space ~
38542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38544 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38551 \begin_layout Subsection
38555 \begin_layout Standard
38556 Un/compresses the current document.
38559 \begin_layout Subsection
38563 \begin_layout Standard
38564 The document settings are described in appendix
38565 \begin_inset space ~
38569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38571 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38578 \begin_layout Section
38580 \begin_inset Index idx
38583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38592 \begin_layout Subsection
38596 \begin_layout Standard
38597 Spell checking is explained in section
38598 \begin_inset space ~
38602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38604 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38611 \begin_layout Subsection
38615 \begin_layout Standard
38616 The thesaurus is described in section
38617 \begin_inset space ~
38621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38623 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38630 \begin_layout Subsection
38632 \begin_inset Index idx
38635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38642 \begin_inset Index idx
38645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38654 \begin_layout Standard
38655 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38656 the highlighted document part.
38659 \begin_layout Subsection
38664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38672 \begin_inset Index idx
38675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38676 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38685 \begin_layout Standard
38686 Generates with the help of the program
38688 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38691 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38692 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38693 This feature is not available on Windows.
38696 \begin_layout Subsection
38701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38709 \begin_inset Index idx
38712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38722 \begin_layout Standard
38723 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38728 \begin_inset space ~
38733 to see the full filename paths.
38736 \begin_layout Subsection
38738 \begin_inset Index idx
38741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38750 \begin_layout Standard
38751 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38752 files as described in section
38753 \begin_inset space ~
38757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38759 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38766 \begin_layout Subsection
38768 \begin_inset Index idx
38771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38784 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38802 \begin_inset Index idx
38805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38806 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38815 \begin_layout Standard
38816 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38817 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38818 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38819 -packages and programs it needs; see
38821 \begin_inset space ~
38825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38827 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38834 \begin_layout Subsection
38838 \begin_layout Standard
38843 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38844 \begin_inset space ~
38848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38850 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38857 \begin_layout Section
38859 \begin_inset Index idx
38862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38871 \begin_layout Standard
38872 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38873 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38875 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38879 \begin_layout Standard
38884 \begin_inset space ~
38889 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38890 -document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38891 -packages and classes found
38892 by \SpecialChar LyX
38894 \begin_inset space ~
38898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38900 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38907 \begin_layout Standard
38911 \begin_inset space ~
38918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38927 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38932 \begin_layout Section
38934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38936 name "sec:Toolbars"
38943 \begin_layout Standard
38944 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38945 \begin_inset space ~
38949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38951 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38958 \begin_layout Standard
38959 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38960 This is described in the
38962 Additional Features
38967 \begin_layout Subsection
38969 \begin_inset Index idx
38972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38981 \begin_layout Standard
38982 \begin_inset Graphics
38983 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38991 \begin_layout Standard
38992 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38998 \begin_layout Standard
38999 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39016 \begin_inset Note Note
39019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39020 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
39025 manual for more information.
39033 \begin_layout Standard
39034 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39040 \begin_layout Standard
39041 \begin_inset Tabular
39042 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
39043 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39044 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
39045 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
39047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39051 \begin_inset Graphics
39052 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
39062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39066 pull-down box for the environments
39079 \begin_layout Standard
39080 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
39086 \begin_layout Standard
39088 \begin_inset Tabular
39089 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
39090 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39091 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39092 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39093 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39116 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39123 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39146 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39153 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39176 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39183 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39192 arg "dialog-show print"
39200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39206 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39213 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39222 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
39230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39236 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39243 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39266 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39273 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39296 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39303 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39326 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39333 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39356 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39363 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39386 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39393 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39402 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
39410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39416 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39426 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39435 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39442 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
39450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39456 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39458 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39462 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39475 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39484 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
39492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39498 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39499 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
39506 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39527 Emphasize text, function of the
39529 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39531 \begin_inset space ~
39534 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39543 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39564 Set text to noun style, function of the
39566 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39568 \begin_inset space ~
39571 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39580 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39589 arg "textstyle-apply"
39597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39601 Format text using the current settings in the
39603 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39605 \begin_inset space ~
39608 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39617 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39640 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39641 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39643 \begin_inset space ~
39652 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39661 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39675 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39682 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39689 arg "tabular-insert"
39697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39710 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39719 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39731 Toggle outline window on/off,
39733 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39740 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39749 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39761 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39767 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39776 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39788 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39801 \begin_layout Subsection
39803 \begin_inset Index idx
39806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39815 \begin_layout Standard
39816 \begin_inset Graphics
39817 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39825 \begin_layout Standard
39826 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39832 \begin_layout Standard
39833 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39837 \begin_layout Standard
39838 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39844 \begin_layout Standard
39845 \begin_inset Tabular
39846 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39847 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39848 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39849 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39850 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39877 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39886 arg "layout Enumerate"
39894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39904 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39913 arg "layout Itemize"
39921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39931 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39958 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39967 arg "layout Description"
39975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39985 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39994 arg "depth-increment"
40002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40008 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40010 \begin_inset space ~
40014 \begin_inset space ~
40023 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40032 arg "depth-decrement"
40040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40046 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40048 \begin_inset space ~
40052 \begin_inset space ~
40061 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40070 arg "float-insert figure"
40078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40084 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40085 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
40092 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40101 arg "float-insert table"
40109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40115 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40116 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
40123 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40146 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40153 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40162 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
40170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40176 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40183 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40192 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
40200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40213 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40236 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40238 \begin_inset space ~
40247 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40256 arg "nomencl-insert"
40264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40270 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40272 \begin_inset space ~
40281 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40290 arg "footnote-insert"
40298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40304 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40311 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40320 arg "marginalnote-insert"
40328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40334 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40336 \begin_inset space ~
40345 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40369 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
40374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40382 \begin_inset space ~
40391 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40400 arg "box-insert Frameless"
40408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40414 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40421 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40444 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40451 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40474 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40491 \begin_inset space ~
40500 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40509 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
40517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40523 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40524 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
40531 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40540 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
40548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40554 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40555 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40557 \begin_inset space ~
40566 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40575 arg "dialog-show character"
40583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40589 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40591 \begin_inset space ~
40594 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40601 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40610 arg "layout-paragraph"
40618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40624 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40626 \begin_inset space ~
40635 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40644 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40658 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40672 \begin_layout Subsection
40673 View/Update Toolbar
40674 \begin_inset Index idx
40677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40678 Toolbar ! View / Update
40686 \begin_layout Standard
40687 \begin_inset Graphics
40688 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40695 \begin_layout Standard
40696 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40702 \begin_layout Standard
40703 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40707 \begin_layout Standard
40708 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40714 \begin_layout Standard
40715 \begin_inset Tabular
40716 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40717 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40718 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40719 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40720 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40743 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40750 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40759 arg "buffer-update"
40767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40773 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40780 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40789 arg "master-buffer-view"
40797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40803 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40805 \begin_inset space ~
40814 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40823 arg "master-buffer-update"
40831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40837 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40839 \begin_inset space ~
40843 \begin_inset space ~
40852 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40861 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40875 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40876 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40877 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40878 Synchronize with Output
40884 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40889 \begin_inset Graphics
40890 filename ../images/view-others.png
40892 groupId toolbarbuttons
40903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40909 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40910 View (Other Formats)
40916 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40921 \begin_inset Graphics
40922 filename ../images/update-others.png
40924 groupId toolbarbuttons
40933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40939 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40940 Update (Other Formats)
40953 \begin_layout Standard
40954 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40958 \begin_layout Subsection
40962 \begin_layout Standard
40963 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40964 \begin_inset space ~
40968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40970 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40974 , the table toolbar
40975 \begin_inset Index idx
40978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40987 \begin_inset space ~
40992 manual and the math macro toolbar
40993 \begin_inset Index idx
40996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41009 \begin_layout Chapter
41010 The Document Settings
41011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41013 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
41018 \begin_inset Index idx
41021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41022 Document ! Settings
41030 \begin_layout Standard
41034 \begin_inset space ~
41039 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
41040 is called with the menu
41042 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41046 You can save your document settings as default with the
41048 Save as Document Defaults
41050 button in any dialog.
41051 This will create a template named
41055 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
41056 when you create a new document without
41060 \begin_layout Standard
41065 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
41066 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
41069 \begin_layout Standard
41070 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
41071 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
41072 to find the one you are looking for.
41073 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
41074 the submenus of the dialog.
41076 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41080 \begin_inset space \space{}
41084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41091 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
41092 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
41093 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
41096 \begin_layout Section
41100 \begin_layout Standard
41101 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
41103 Document classes are described in section
41104 \begin_inset space ~
41108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41110 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
41118 \begin_layout Standard
41122 \begin_inset space ~
41127 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
41132 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
41133 as a layout for a document class.
41134 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
41136 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
41145 \begin_layout Standard
41146 Some classes use special class options by default.
41147 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
41151 and you can decide to use them or not.
41152 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
41153 recommended you leave them untouched.
41158 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41159 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
41164 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41166 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
41171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41172 When you want to use one of the following drivers
41173 \begin_inset Newline newline
41178 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
41181 \begin_inset Newline newline
41184 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41185 distribution, see section
41190 \begin_inset CommandInset href
41192 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
41204 \begin_layout Standard
41209 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
41210 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
41211 in the background if the child document
41212 is opened without its master.
41213 This way child documents are always compilable.
41214 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
41221 \begin_inset space ~
41229 \begin_layout Standard
41230 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41241 \begin_inset Index idx
41244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41246 -packages ! prettyref
41252 \begin_inset Index idx
41255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41257 -packages ! refstyle
41262 for cross-references, see section
41263 \begin_inset space ~
41267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41269 reference "sec:Cross-References"
41276 \begin_layout Section
41280 \begin_layout Standard
41281 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
41282 Please refer to the section
41285 \begin_inset space ~
41293 \begin_inset space ~
41298 manual for details.
41301 \begin_layout Section
41305 \begin_layout Standard
41306 Modules are explained in section
41307 \begin_inset space ~
41311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41313 reference "subsec:Modules"
41320 \begin_layout Section
41324 \begin_layout Standard
41326 \begin_inset space ~
41330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41332 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
41339 \begin_layout Section
41343 \begin_layout Standard
41344 The document font settings are described in section
41345 \begin_inset space ~
41349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41351 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
41358 \begin_layout Section
41362 \begin_layout Standard
41363 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
41375 \begin_inset space ~
41380 and whether it should be a
41383 \begin_inset space ~
41388 can also be specified here.
41391 \begin_layout Standard
41392 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
41393 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
41394 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
41396 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
41399 \begin_layout Standard
41402 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
41405 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
41406 justifies the text on screen.
41407 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
41411 \begin_layout Section
41415 \begin_layout Standard
41416 This dialog is described in sections
41417 \begin_inset space ~
41421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41423 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
41428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41430 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
41437 \begin_layout Section
41441 \begin_layout Standard
41442 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
41443 \begin_inset space ~
41447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41449 reference "subsec:Margins"
41456 \begin_layout Section
41458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41460 name "sec:Language-encodings"
41465 \begin_inset Index idx
41468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41469 Language ! Encoding
41477 \begin_layout Standard
41478 The document language and quote styles are set here.
41479 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
41480 (the \SpecialChar LyX
41482 is always encoded in utf8).
41483 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
41484 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
41485 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
41486 -command is not known for
41487 a particular character).
41490 \begin_layout Standard
41491 If you use the option
41496 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
41497 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
41498 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41500 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
41501 exactly one encoding.
41502 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
41505 \begin_layout Standard
41507 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
41508 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
41509 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41510 installation supports Unicode), choose
41511 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
41512 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
41513 is quite incomplete, so
41514 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
41519 (when \SpecialChar LyX
41520 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
41521 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
41522 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
41523 -commands is not used, because all
41524 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
41525 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41526 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41527 , two new alternative engines
41528 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
41530 Both engines support Unicode natively.
41532 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
41535 \begin_inset space ~
41542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41554 \begin_inset space ~
41561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41573 \begin_inset space ~
41576 (Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41580 \begin_inset space ~
41584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41586 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
41591 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
41595 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
41598 \begin_layout Standard
41602 \begin_inset space ~
41607 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41608 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
41610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41618 The possible settings are:
41621 \begin_layout Description
41622 Default uses the language package that is selected in
41624 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41625 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41629 \begin_inset space ~
41633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41635 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
41642 \begin_layout Description
41643 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41644 format you will use.
41645 In many cases this will be
41650 \begin_inset Index idx
41653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41661 If the newer package
41666 \begin_inset Index idx
41669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41671 -packages ! polyglossia
41676 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41678 \change_inserted -712698321 1432730145
41682 \change_deleted -712698321 1432730156
41685 non-\SpecialChar TeX
41686 fonts), this package will be used instead of
41693 \begin_layout Description
41695 \begin_inset space ~
41706 would be more appropriate.
41709 \begin_layout Description
41710 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41711 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41715 (for German texts), type in
41718 \begin_inset Newline newline
41723 usepackage{ngerman}
41726 \begin_layout Description
41727 None will not use a language package.
41728 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41731 \begin_layout Standard
41732 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41735 \begin_layout Description
41737 \begin_inset space ~
41741 \begin_inset space ~
41745 \begin_inset space ~
41752 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41758 \begin_inset Index idx
41761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41763 -packages ! inputenc
41769 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41770 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41771 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41775 \begin_layout Description
41776 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41778 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41779 commands, which may result in a big
41780 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41781 -commands are needed.
41784 \begin_layout Description
41786 \begin_inset space ~
41790 \begin_inset space ~
41793 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41796 \begin_layout Description
41798 \begin_inset space ~
41802 \begin_inset space ~
41805 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41808 \begin_layout Description
41810 \begin_inset space ~
41813 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41816 \begin_layout Description
41818 \begin_inset space ~
41822 \begin_inset space ~
41825 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41826 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41829 \begin_layout Description
41831 \begin_inset space ~
41835 \begin_inset space ~
41838 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41842 \begin_layout Description
41844 \begin_inset space ~
41848 \begin_inset space ~
41851 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41852 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41855 \begin_layout Description
41857 \begin_inset space ~
41861 \begin_inset space ~
41865 \begin_inset space ~
41868 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41869 \begin_inset space ~
41875 \begin_layout Description
41877 \begin_inset space ~
41881 \begin_inset space ~
41885 \begin_inset space ~
41888 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41889 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41892 \begin_layout Description
41894 \begin_inset space ~
41898 \begin_inset space ~
41901 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41902 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41903 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41904 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41905 \begin_inset space ~
41909 \begin_inset space ~
41915 \begin_layout Description
41917 \begin_inset space ~
41921 \begin_inset space ~
41924 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41925 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41926 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41928 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41929 \begin_inset space ~
41933 \begin_inset space ~
41939 \begin_layout Description
41941 \begin_inset space ~
41945 \begin_inset space ~
41948 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41951 \begin_layout Description
41953 \begin_inset space ~
41957 \begin_inset space ~
41960 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41963 \begin_layout Description
41965 \begin_inset space ~
41969 \begin_inset space ~
41972 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41975 \begin_layout Description
41977 \begin_inset space ~
41980 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41983 \begin_layout Description
41985 \begin_inset space ~
41988 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41991 \begin_layout Description
41993 \begin_inset space ~
41997 \begin_inset space ~
42000 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
42003 \begin_layout Description
42005 \begin_inset space ~
42009 \begin_inset space ~
42015 \begin_layout Description
42017 \begin_inset space ~
42021 \begin_inset space ~
42024 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
42027 \begin_layout Description
42029 \begin_inset space ~
42033 \begin_inset space ~
42039 \begin_layout Description
42041 \begin_inset space ~
42045 \begin_inset space ~
42048 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42054 \begin_inset Index idx
42057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42064 , when using this, set the document language to
42069 \begin_layout Description
42071 \begin_inset space ~
42075 \begin_inset space ~
42078 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42083 , when using this, set the document language to
42086 \begin_inset space ~
42092 \begin_layout Description
42094 \begin_inset space ~
42098 \begin_inset space ~
42101 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42107 \begin_inset Index idx
42110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42112 -packages ! japanese
42117 , when using this, set the document language to
42122 \begin_layout Description
42124 \begin_inset space ~
42128 \begin_inset space ~
42131 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42136 , when using this, set the document language to
42141 \begin_layout Description
42143 \begin_inset space ~
42147 \begin_inset space ~
42150 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42155 , when using this, set the document language to
42160 \begin_layout Description
42162 \begin_inset space ~
42165 (EUC-KR) for Korean
42168 \begin_layout Description
42170 \begin_inset space ~
42174 \begin_inset space ~
42178 \begin_inset space ~
42181 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
42184 \begin_layout Description
42186 \begin_inset space ~
42190 \begin_inset space ~
42194 \begin_inset space ~
42197 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
42198 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
42199 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
42202 \begin_layout Description
42204 \begin_inset space ~
42208 \begin_inset space ~
42214 \begin_layout Description
42216 \begin_inset space ~
42220 \begin_inset space ~
42223 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
42224 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
42227 \begin_layout Description
42229 \begin_inset space ~
42233 \begin_inset space ~
42236 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42242 \begin_inset Index idx
42245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42252 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
42255 \begin_layout Description
42257 \begin_inset space ~
42260 (Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42262 \begin_inset space ~
42265 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
42272 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42275 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42282 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
42283 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
42285 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
42288 \begin_layout Description
42290 \begin_inset space ~
42294 \begin_inset space ~
42297 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42303 \begin_inset Index idx
42306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42313 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
42316 \begin_layout Description
42318 \begin_inset space ~
42321 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42327 \begin_inset Index idx
42330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42332 -packages ! inputenc
42338 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
42342 \begin_layout Description
42344 \begin_inset space ~
42348 \begin_inset space ~
42352 \begin_inset space ~
42355 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
42356 \begin_inset space ~
42362 \begin_layout Description
42364 \begin_inset space ~
42368 \begin_inset space ~
42372 \begin_inset space ~
42375 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
42376 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
42377 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
42381 \begin_layout Description
42383 \begin_inset space ~
42387 \begin_inset space ~
42391 \begin_inset space ~
42394 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
42395 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
42398 \begin_layout Section
42400 \begin_inset Index idx
42403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42410 \begin_inset Index idx
42413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42420 \begin_inset Index idx
42423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42424 Color ! Shaded boxes
42430 \begin_inset Index idx
42433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42434 Color ! Greyed-out notes
42442 \begin_layout Standard
42443 Here you can alter the font color for the
42447 (default: black), for
42450 \begin_inset space ~
42455 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
42459 (default: white) and for
42462 \begin_inset space ~
42472 sets the color back to the default.
42475 \begin_layout Standard
42476 Clicking any button showing
42484 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
42485 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
42486 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
42487 later more quickly.
42490 \begin_layout Standard
42491 Note, if you change the
42494 \begin_inset space ~
42499 font color and use the option
42502 \begin_inset space ~
42507 in the document settings under
42510 \begin_inset space ~
42515 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
42516 \begin_inset space ~
42520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42522 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42529 \begin_layout Standard
42530 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
42536 \begin_layout Standard
42540 \begin_inset space ~
42549 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
42552 \begin_inset space ~
42555 Code after a forced page break:
42558 \begin_layout Itemize
42559 For the page color:
42560 \begin_inset Newline newline
42567 pagecolor{color name}
42570 \begin_layout Itemize
42571 For the text color:
42572 \begin_inset Newline newline
42582 \begin_layout Standard
42583 You are restricted to one of
42619 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
42626 \begin_inset space ~
42632 \begin_inset Newline newline
42635 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
42636 names to refer to them:
42639 \begin_layout Itemize
42645 \begin_inset Newline newline
42650 page_backgroundcolor
42653 \begin_layout Itemize
42657 \begin_inset space ~
42663 \begin_inset Newline newline
42671 \begin_layout Itemize
42675 \begin_inset space ~
42681 \begin_inset Newline newline
42689 \begin_layout Itemize
42693 \begin_inset space ~
42699 \begin_inset Newline newline
42707 \begin_layout Standard
42708 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42711 \begin_inset space ~
42719 \begin_inset space ~
42727 \begin_layout Section
42731 \begin_layout Standard
42732 Here you can adjust the
42736 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42740 as described in section
42741 \begin_inset space ~
42745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42747 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42754 \begin_layout Section
42758 \begin_layout Standard
42759 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42765 \begin_inset Index idx
42768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42780 \begin_inset Index idx
42783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42785 -packages ! jurabib
42793 Sectioned bibliography
42795 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42801 \begin_inset Index idx
42804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42806 -packages ! bibtopic
42811 and you can select a
42815 for the generation of the bibliography.
42816 For a further description see section
42817 \begin_inset space ~
42821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42823 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42830 \begin_layout Section
42834 \begin_layout Standard
42835 Here you can define the
42839 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42841 \begin_inset space ~
42845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42847 reference "sec:Index"
42854 \begin_layout Section
42858 \begin_layout Standard
42859 The PDF properties are explained in section
42860 \begin_inset space ~
42864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42866 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42873 \begin_layout Section
42877 \begin_layout Standard
42878 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42879 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42885 \begin_inset Index idx
42888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42890 -packages ! amsmath
42900 \begin_inset Index idx
42903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42905 -packages ! amssymb
42915 \begin_inset Index idx
42918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42930 \begin_inset Index idx
42933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42945 \begin_inset Index idx
42948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42950 -packages ! mathdots
42960 \begin_inset Index idx
42963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42965 -packages ! mathtools
42975 \begin_inset Index idx
42978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42990 \begin_inset Index idx
42993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42995 -packages ! stackrel
43005 \begin_inset Index idx
43008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43010 -packages ! stmaryrd
43020 \begin_inset Index idx
43023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43025 -packages ! undertilde
43030 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
43033 \begin_layout Description
43034 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
43035 -errors in formulas,
43036 ensure that you have this enabled.
43039 \begin_layout Description
43040 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
43041 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
43042 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
43046 \begin_layout Description
43047 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
43050 \begin_inset space ~
43062 \begin_layout Description
43063 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
43066 \begin_inset space ~
43078 \begin_layout Description
43079 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
43090 \begin_layout Description
43091 mathtools is used for the math commands
43127 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
43134 \begin_layout Description
43135 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
43137 Chemical Symbols and Equations
43146 \begin_layout Description
43147 stackrel is used for the math command
43164 \begin_layout Description
43165 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
43168 \begin_layout Description
43169 undertilde is used for the math command
43177 Accents for one Character
43186 \begin_layout Section
43190 \begin_layout Standard
43191 The float placement options are described in the section
43194 \begin_inset space ~
43202 \begin_inset space ~
43210 \begin_layout Section
43214 \begin_layout Standard
43215 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
43217 Program Code Listings
43222 \begin_inset space ~
43230 \begin_layout Section
43234 \begin_layout Standard
43235 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
43243 set to be used and set the
43248 The itemize environment is described in section
43249 \begin_inset space ~
43253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43255 reference "sec:Itemize"
43262 \begin_layout Standard
43263 You can furthermore specify a
43266 \begin_inset space ~
43271 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43272 command of the desired character.
43273 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
43280 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
43282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43286 \begin_inset space \space{}
43290 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
43300 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
43301 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
43304 \begin_layout Standard
43305 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43313 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43314 -packages in the preamble (menu
43317 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43318 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43321 \begin_inset space ~
43327 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
43331 usepackage{textcomp}
43334 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
43338 usepackage{amssymb}
43348 \begin_layout Section
43352 \begin_layout Standard
43353 Branches are described in section
43354 \begin_inset space ~
43358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43360 reference "sec:Branches"
43367 \begin_layout Section
43369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43371 name "sec:Doc-Output"
43378 \begin_layout Standard
43379 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
43382 \begin_layout Description
43384 \begin_inset space ~
43388 \begin_inset space ~
43391 Format: The format that is used when you enter
43392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43411 View Master Document
43412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43419 Update Master Document
43420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43427 menu or the toolbar.
43428 The default is set in
43430 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43431 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43433 \begin_inset space ~
43436 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43440 \begin_inset space ~
43444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43446 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43453 \begin_layout Description
43455 \begin_inset space ~
43459 \begin_inset space ~
43462 Output settings for the menu
43464 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43466 \begin_inset space ~
43472 For a detailed description see section
43474 Reverse DVI/PDF search
43479 \begin_inset space ~
43487 \begin_layout Description
43489 \begin_inset space ~
43493 \begin_inset space ~
43496 Options offers settings for the export format
43502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43515 \begin_inset space ~
43520 will assure that the output follows exactly version
43521 \begin_inset space ~
43524 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
43528 \begin_inset space ~
43533 settings are described in detail in section
43535 Math Output in XHTML
43540 \begin_inset space ~
43549 \begin_inset space ~
43553 \begin_inset space ~
43558 is used for the size of equations in the output.
43561 \begin_layout Section
43566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43576 \begin_layout Standard
43577 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
43579 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
43581 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43583 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
43587 \begin_layout Standard
43588 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43589 -syntax is given in section
43590 \begin_inset space ~
43594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43596 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
43603 \begin_layout Chapter
43609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43611 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43616 \begin_inset Index idx
43619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43628 \begin_layout Standard
43629 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
43631 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43635 It has the following submenus.
43638 \begin_layout Section
43642 \begin_layout Subsection
43646 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43647 User Interface File
43648 \begin_inset Index idx
43651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43652 Customization ! of toolbars
43658 \begin_inset Index idx
43661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43662 Customization ! of menus
43670 \begin_layout Standard
43671 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43672 interface (ui) file.
43673 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43681 \begin_layout Description
43686 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43689 \begin_layout Description
43696 the menu entries in popup context menus
43699 \begin_layout Description
43704 specifies the toolbar buttons
43707 \begin_layout Standard
43708 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43709 and edit the entries.
43712 \begin_layout Standard
43713 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43725 entries must be finished with an explicit
43750 and in the case of the
43751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43763 The syntax for the entries is:
43766 \begin_layout Standard
43767 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43796 \begin_layout Standard
43798 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43801 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43802 -functions are listed in the menu
43804 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43817 \begin_inset space ~
43825 \begin_layout Standard
43826 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43832 \begin_layout Standard
43833 For example, assuming you use the menu
43835 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43838 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43842 \begin_layout Standard
43843 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43867 \begin_layout Standard
43869 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43884 to have the sixth bookmark.
43887 \begin_layout Standard
43891 \begin_inset space ~
43896 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43897 's toolbar buttons.
43898 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43899 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43902 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43909 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43913 \begin_layout Standard
43916 Enable tool tips in main work area
43918 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43922 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43926 \begin_layout Standard
43931 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43932 should display in the menu
43934 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43936 \begin_inset space ~
43944 \begin_layout Subsection
43948 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43952 \begin_layout Standard
43955 Restore window layouts and geometries
43958 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43959 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43963 \begin_layout Standard
43966 Restore cursor positions
43968 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43972 \begin_layout Standard
43975 Load opened files from last session
43977 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43981 \begin_layout Standard
43984 Clear all session information
43986 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43987 sessions (cursor positions, names
43988 of last opened documents, etc.).
43991 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43995 name "subsec:Backup documents"
44000 \begin_inset Index idx
44003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44012 \begin_layout Standard
44015 Backup original documents when saving
44017 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
44018 it was saved the last time.
44019 It is stored in the
44022 \begin_inset space ~
44028 \begin_inset space ~
44032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44034 reference "sec:Paths"
44038 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
44041 \begin_inset space ~
44047 The backup file has the file extension
44048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44062 \begin_layout Standard
44065 Backup documents, every
44067 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
44070 \begin_layout Standard
44073 Save documents compressed by default
44075 always saves files in a compressed format.
44078 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44079 Windows & work area
44082 \begin_layout Standard
44085 Open documents in tabs
44087 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
44091 \begin_layout Standard
44096 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
44101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44109 reference "sec:Paths"
44113 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
44120 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
44121 documents will be opened in the same running instance
44122 of \SpecialChar LyX
44124 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
44125 instance is created for each file.
44128 \begin_layout Standard
44131 Single close-tab button
44133 is checked, there will only be one close button (
44136 \begin_inset Graphics
44137 filename ../images/closetab.png
44144 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
44145 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
44148 \begin_layout Standard
44149 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44157 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
44158 before the change takes effect.
44166 \begin_layout Standard
44171 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
44173 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
44175 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44179 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
44180 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
44181 and only want to close the view in once instance.
44184 \begin_layout Subsection
44186 \begin_inset Index idx
44189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44196 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44198 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
44205 \begin_layout Standard
44206 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
44210 \begin_layout Standard
44211 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44219 This section only deals with the fonts
44223 the \SpecialChar LyX
44225 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
44228 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44229 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44240 \begin_layout Standard
44241 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
44258 (depends on the system) as its
44261 \begin_inset space ~
44277 \begin_layout Standard
44278 You can change the font size with the
44285 \begin_layout Standard
44290 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
44292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44295 points have the size of 1
44296 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44300 \begin_inset space ~
44304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44306 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
44311 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
44312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44316 The sizes are explained in detail in section
44317 \begin_inset space ~
44321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44323 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
44330 \begin_layout Standard
44333 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
44335 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
44336 needs to redraw the screen less often.
44337 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
44338 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
44339 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
44341 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
44342 \begin_inset space ~
44348 \begin_layout Subsection
44350 \begin_inset Index idx
44353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44354 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
44361 \begin_inset Index idx
44364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44373 \begin_layout Standard
44374 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
44375 by choosing an item in the
44376 list and selecting the
44383 \begin_layout Standard
44384 By checking the option
44388 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
44391 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
44392 \begin_inset space ~
44396 \begin_inset space ~
44401 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
44404 \begin_layout Subsection
44406 \begin_inset Index idx
44409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44418 \begin_layout Standard
44419 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
44423 \begin_layout Standard
44428 enables previewing snippets of your document.
44429 This feature is described in section
44430 \begin_inset space ~
44434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44436 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44443 \begin_layout Standard
44444 Checking the option
44447 \begin_inset space ~
44451 \begin_inset space ~
44455 \begin_inset space ~
44460 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
44463 \begin_layout Section
44465 \begin_inset Index idx
44468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44477 \begin_layout Subsection
44481 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44485 \begin_layout Standard
44488 Cursor follows scrollbar
44490 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
44494 \begin_layout Standard
44495 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
44496 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
44497 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
44500 \begin_layout Standard
44503 Scroll below end of document
44505 is self-explanatory.
44508 \begin_layout Standard
44509 In \SpecialChar LyX
44510 one can jump from word to word by pressing
44517 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
44519 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
44520 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
44523 \begin_layout Standard
44526 Sort environments alphabetically
44528 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
44531 \begin_layout Standard
44534 Group environments by their category
44536 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
44539 \begin_layout Standard
44544 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
44555 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44559 \begin_layout Standard
44560 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
44565 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
44566 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
44570 \begin_layout Subsection
44572 \begin_inset Index idx
44575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44582 \begin_inset Index idx
44585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44586 Settings ! Shortcuts
44594 \begin_layout Standard
44599 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
44600 -function to a key.
44601 Several binding files are available, among them:
44604 \begin_layout Description
44605 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
44608 \begin_layout Description
44609 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
44621 \begin_layout Description
44622 mac.bind a set of bindings for
44625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44633 \begin_layout Standard
44634 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
44639 , and binding files for special languages.
44640 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
44641 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44645 \begin_inset space \space{}
44649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44657 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
44658 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
44659 will try to use the appropriate binding
44663 \begin_layout Standard
44664 Some binding files, like
44668 , only have a limited scope.
44669 When looking at the end of the file
44673 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44676 \begin_layout Standard
44680 \begin_inset space ~
44684 \begin_inset space ~
44689 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44690 in the selected key binding file.
44693 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44695 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44697 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44702 \begin_inset Index idx
44705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44706 Key Bindings ! Editing
44714 \begin_layout Standard
44715 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44716 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44717 -functions and the bound shortcuts.
44718 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44721 Show key-bindings containing
44724 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44725 Insert there for example as keyword
44726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44733 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44734 functions that contain
44735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44743 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44744 All \SpecialChar LyX
44745 -functions are also listed in the file
44750 that you will find in the
44757 \begin_layout Standard
44758 For example, to add the shortcut
44766 , select the function and press the
44771 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44772 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44775 \begin_layout Standard
44776 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44777 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44779 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44780 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44782 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44787 \begin_layout Standard
44788 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44791 \begin_layout Standard
44792 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44794 The syntax of the entries is:
44797 \begin_layout Standard
44803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44822 \begin_layout Subsection
44824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44826 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44831 \begin_inset Index idx
44834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44841 \begin_inset Index idx
44844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44845 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44853 \begin_layout Standard
44854 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44855 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44856 provides keyboard maps.
44857 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44858 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44861 \begin_inset space ~
44865 \begin_inset space ~
44870 and select the keyboard map file named
44877 \begin_layout Standard
44886 keyboard map and, if you use the
44890 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44893 arg "keymap-primary"
44899 arg "keymap-secondary"
44902 respectively or toggle between them with
44905 arg "keymap-toggle"
44911 \begin_layout Standard
44912 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44920 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44929 \begin_layout Standard
44930 You can also specify the mouse
44932 Wheel scrolling speed
44935 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44939 \begin_layout Standard
44947 \begin_inset space ~
44951 \begin_inset space ~
44956 you can select a key for zooming.
44957 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44960 \begin_layout Subsection
44964 \begin_layout Standard
44965 Input completion is described in section
44966 \begin_inset space ~
44970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44972 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44979 \begin_layout Section
44981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44988 \begin_inset Index idx
44991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44998 \begin_inset Index idx
45001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45010 \begin_layout Standard
45011 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
45012 are normally determined during
45014 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
45017 \begin_layout Description
45019 \begin_inset space ~
45022 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
45023 's working directory.
45024 It is the default when you
45035 \begin_inset space ~
45043 \begin_layout Description
45045 \begin_inset space ~
45048 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
45050 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45052 \begin_inset space ~
45056 \begin_inset space ~
45064 \begin_layout Description
45066 \begin_inset space ~
45069 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
45075 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45079 \begin_inset Newline newline
45083 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45095 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
45096 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
45104 \begin_layout Description
45106 \begin_inset space ~
45110 \begin_inset Index idx
45113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45119 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
45120 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
45121 \begin_inset space ~
45125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45127 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
45135 will be used to save the backups.
45136 \begin_inset Newline newline
45139 Backup files have the ending
45140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45150 \begin_layout Description
45155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45163 \begin_inset space ~
45166 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
45167 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
45169 \begin_inset Newline newline
45176 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45182 You can edit this file with the program
45191 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
45192 in its preferences under
45195 \begin_inset space ~
45201 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
45206 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
45208 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
45209 in your \SpecialChar LyX
45215 and \SpecialChar LyX
45216 need to be running the same time.
45217 \begin_inset Newline newline
45220 The pipe is also used for the
45225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45231 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
45236 \begin_inset Newline newline
45239 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
45240 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
45241 \begin_inset Newline newline
45257 \begin_layout Description
45259 \begin_inset space ~
45262 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
45265 \begin_layout Description
45267 \begin_inset space ~
45270 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
45271 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
45272 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
45275 \begin_layout Description
45277 \begin_inset space ~
45280 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
45286 You only need to specify it if you are using
45290 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
45292 For \SpecialChar LyX
45297 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
45301 \begin_layout Description
45303 \begin_inset space ~
45306 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
45307 When \SpecialChar LyX
45308 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
45309 to find it on the system.
45310 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
45312 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
45314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45321 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
45322 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
45325 \begin_layout Description
45327 \begin_inset space ~
45330 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
45331 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
45332 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
45333 code or in the document
45335 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
45337 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
45338 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
45339 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
45340 scanned for the input files.
45341 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
45342 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
45344 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
45345 compilation may fail for some documents.
45348 \begin_layout Section
45352 \begin_layout Standard
45353 Here you can insert your
45362 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
45364 \begin_inset space ~
45368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45370 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45374 , to mark changes you make as yours.
45377 \begin_layout Section
45379 \begin_inset Index idx
45382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45383 Language ! Settings
45389 \begin_inset Index idx
45392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45393 Settings ! Language
45401 \begin_layout Subsection
45403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45405 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45412 \begin_layout Description
45414 \begin_inset space ~
45418 \begin_inset space ~
45421 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
45423 You can find its actual translation status here:
45424 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45426 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
45433 \begin_layout Description
45435 \begin_inset space ~
45438 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
45439 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
45440 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
45441 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
45442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45458 The most widespread language package is
45463 \begin_inset Index idx
45466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45473 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
45475 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45476 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45477 come with the alternative
45483 \begin_inset Index idx
45486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45488 -packages ! polyglossia
45493 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
45494 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
45500 The available selections are described in section
45501 \begin_inset space ~
45505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45507 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
45514 \begin_layout Description
45516 \begin_inset space ~
45519 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45520 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
45521 you can here specify the command to start the package.
45522 An example is the start command
45528 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
45530 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
45534 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45549 selectlanguage{$$lang}
45554 \begin_layout Description
45556 \begin_inset space ~
45564 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
45565 command toggles the package on and off.
45568 \begin_layout Description
45570 \begin_inset space ~
45574 \begin_inset space ~
45577 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
45581 \begin_layout Description
45583 \begin_inset space ~
45587 \begin_inset space ~
45590 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
45594 \begin_layout Description
45596 \begin_inset space ~
45600 \begin_inset space ~
45603 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
45604 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
45605 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
45607 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
45614 \begin_layout Description
45616 \begin_inset space ~
45619 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
45621 When this option is not set, the
45624 \begin_inset space ~
45629 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45631 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
45634 \begin_inset space ~
45642 \begin_layout Description
45644 \begin_inset space ~
45650 \begin_inset space ~
45656 When it is not set, the
45659 \begin_inset space ~
45664 is set to the end of the document.
45667 \begin_layout Description
45669 \begin_inset space ~
45673 \begin_inset space ~
45676 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45677 language will be underlined in blue.
45680 \begin_layout Description
45682 \begin_inset space ~
45686 \begin_inset space ~
45689 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45690 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45693 \begin_layout Description
45695 \begin_inset space ~
45698 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45699 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45700 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45701 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45704 \begin_layout Subsection
45708 \begin_layout Standard
45709 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45710 \begin_inset space ~
45714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45716 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45723 \begin_layout Section
45727 \begin_layout Subsection
45731 \begin_layout Description
45733 \begin_inset space ~
45737 \begin_inset space ~
45740 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45743 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45744 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45746 \begin_inset space ~
45752 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45755 \begin_layout Description
45757 \begin_inset space ~
45761 \begin_inset Index idx
45764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45771 \begin_inset Index idx
45774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45775 Settings ! Date format
45780 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45781 \begin_inset Newline newline
45785 \begin_inset Flex URL
45788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45790 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
45796 \begin_inset Newline newline
45799 For example the format
45800 \begin_inset Newline newline
45804 \begin_inset Newline newline
45807 prints the date as day/month/year.
45810 \begin_layout Description
45812 \begin_inset space ~
45816 \begin_inset space ~
45819 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45820 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45823 \begin_layout Description
45825 \begin_inset space ~
45828 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45830 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45832 \begin_inset space ~
45838 For a detailed description see section
45840 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45845 \begin_inset space ~
45851 \change_inserted 2089657418 1433036195
45853 \begin_inset Note Note
45856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45858 \change_inserted 2089657418 1433036213
45861 Check why this does no longer exists
45873 \begin_layout Subsection
45878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45888 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45893 \begin_inset Index idx
45896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45897 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45906 \begin_layout Description
45908 \begin_inset space ~
45915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45923 \begin_inset space ~
45927 \begin_inset space ~
45930 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45935 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45956 are used for Cyrillic.
45957 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45970 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45972 sets up in the background.
45973 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45976 \begin_layout Description
45978 \begin_inset space ~
45982 \begin_inset space ~
45985 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
45990 value depends on your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45994 \begin_layout Description
45996 \begin_inset space ~
46000 \begin_inset space ~
46004 \begin_inset space ~
46008 \begin_inset space ~
46011 options They only have an effect when the program
46015 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
46018 \begin_layout Standard
46019 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
46020 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
46021 manuals of the applications.
46024 \begin_layout Description
46026 \begin_inset space ~
46029 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
46030 \begin_inset space ~
46034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46036 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
46043 \begin_layout Description
46045 \begin_inset space ~
46048 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
46049 \begin_inset space ~
46053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46055 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
46062 \begin_layout Description
46064 \begin_inset space ~
46067 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
46068 \begin_inset space ~
46072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46074 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
46081 \begin_layout Description
46086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46094 \begin_inset space ~
46097 command Command for the program
46099 Check\SpecialChar TeX
46102 that is described in the section
46104 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
46109 Additional Features
46114 \begin_layout Standard
46115 There are additionally the following options:
46118 \begin_layout Description
46120 \begin_inset space ~
46124 \begin_inset space ~
46128 \begin_inset space ~
46132 \begin_inset space ~
46137 \begin_inset space ~
46140 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
46141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46158 to separate folders.
46159 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
46161 \begin_inset Index idx
46164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46171 \begin_inset Index idx
46174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46183 \begin_layout Description
46185 \begin_inset space ~
46189 \begin_inset space ~
46193 \begin_inset space ~
46197 \begin_inset space ~
46201 \begin_inset space ~
46205 \begin_inset space ~
46208 changes Removes all manually set
46214 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46215 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46217 \begin_inset space ~
46222 dialog when changing the document class.
46225 \begin_layout Section
46227 \begin_inset space ~
46231 \begin_inset Index idx
46234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46243 \begin_layout Subsection
46245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46247 name "subsec:Converters"
46252 \begin_inset Index idx
46255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46264 \begin_layout Standard
46265 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
46266 from one format to another.
46267 You can modify converters or create new ones.
46268 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
46275 \begin_inset space ~
46280 field and press the
46285 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
46289 \begin_inset space ~
46294 drop-down list, modify the
46298 field and press the
46305 \begin_layout Standard
46308 Converter File Cache
46314 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
46316 Maximum Age (in days
46319 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
46320 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
46323 \begin_layout Standard
46324 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
46325 definition, is described in the section
46336 \begin_layout Subsection
46338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46340 name "sec:File-Formats"
46345 \begin_inset Index idx
46348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46355 \begin_inset Index idx
46358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46367 \begin_layout Standard
46368 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
46378 programs that should be used for certain formats.
46381 \begin_layout Standard
46382 You can also define the
46384 Default output format
46386 that is used when you use
46388 View, Update, View Master Document
46392 Update Master Document
46398 menu or the toolbar.
46401 \begin_layout Standard
46402 More about formats and their options is described in the section
46413 \begin_layout Standard
46414 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
46416 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
46417 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
46418 This is done by specifying a
46423 More about this is described in the section
46434 \begin_layout Chapter
46435 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
46437 \begin_inset Index idx
46440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46449 name "chap:Units-available-in"
46456 \begin_layout Standard
46458 \begin_inset space ~
46462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46464 reference "tab:Units"
46468 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
46469 and used in this documentation.
46472 \begin_layout Standard
46473 \begin_inset Float table
46479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46480 \begin_inset Caption Standard
46482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46483 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46498 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
46504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46506 \begin_inset Tabular
46507 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
46508 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
46509 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
46510 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
46512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46606 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46610 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46634 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46638 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46661 scaled point (65536
46662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46690 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46722 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46726 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46754 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46777 % of original image width
46784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46991 \begin_layout Chapter
46993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46995 name "chap:Credits"
47002 \begin_layout Standard
47003 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
47004 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
47007 \begin_layout Itemize
47010 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
47013 \begin_layout Itemize
47019 \begin_layout Itemize
47025 \begin_layout Itemize
47031 \begin_layout Itemize
47037 \begin_layout Itemize
47043 \begin_layout Itemize
47049 \begin_layout Itemize
47055 \begin_layout Itemize
47058 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
47061 \begin_layout Itemize
47067 \begin_layout Itemize
47073 \begin_layout Itemize
47079 \begin_layout Itemize
47085 \begin_layout Itemize
47091 \begin_layout Itemize
47097 \begin_layout Itemize
47103 \begin_layout Itemize
47109 \begin_layout Itemize
47110 The \SpecialChar LyX
47112 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47121 \begin_layout Standard
47122 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47125 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
47132 \begin_layout Bibliography
47133 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47134 LatexCommand bibitem
47140 The \SpecialChar LyX
47142 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47145 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
47150 \begin_inset Newline newline
47154 \begin_inset Flex URL
47157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47159 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
47167 \begin_layout Bibliography
47168 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47169 LatexCommand bibitem
47170 key "latexcompanion"
47174 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
47176 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
47177 Companion Second Edition.
47180 Addison-Wesley, 2004
47183 \begin_layout Bibliography
47184 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47185 LatexCommand bibitem
47190 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
47193 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
47197 Addison-Wesley, 2003
47200 \begin_layout Bibliography
47201 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47202 LatexCommand bibitem
47210 : A Document Preparation System.
47213 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
47216 \begin_layout Bibliography
47217 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47218 LatexCommand bibitem
47227 The \SpecialChar TeX
47231 Addison-Wesley, 1984
47234 \begin_layout Bibliography
47235 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47236 LatexCommand bibitem
47241 The \SpecialChar TeX
47243 \begin_inset Newline newline
47247 \begin_inset Flex URL
47250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47252 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
47260 \begin_layout Bibliography
47261 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47262 LatexCommand bibitem
47267 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
47269 \begin_inset Newline newline
47273 \begin_inset Flex URL
47276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47278 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
47286 \begin_layout Bibliography
47287 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47288 LatexCommand bibitem
47294 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47296 name "Documentation"
47297 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
47303 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47307 \begin_inset Newline newline
47311 \begin_inset Flex URL
47314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47316 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
47324 \begin_layout Bibliography
47325 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47326 LatexCommand bibitem
47332 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47334 name "Documentation"
47335 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
47339 how to use the program
47341 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47345 \begin_inset Newline newline
47349 \begin_inset Flex URL
47352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47354 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
47362 \begin_layout Bibliography
47363 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47364 LatexCommand bibitem
47370 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47372 name "Documentation"
47373 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
47382 \begin_inset Newline newline
47386 \begin_inset Flex URL
47389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47391 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
47399 \begin_layout Bibliography
47400 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47401 LatexCommand bibitem
47407 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47409 name "Documentation"
47410 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
47419 \begin_inset Newline newline
47423 \begin_inset Flex URL
47426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47428 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
47436 \begin_layout Bibliography
47437 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47438 LatexCommand bibitem
47444 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47446 name "Documentation"
47447 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
47451 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
47453 \begin_inset Newline newline
47457 \begin_inset Flex URL
47460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47462 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47470 \begin_layout Bibliography
47471 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47472 LatexCommand bibitem
47478 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47480 name "Documentation"
47481 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47485 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47491 \begin_inset Index idx
47494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47496 -packages ! caption
47502 \begin_inset Newline newline
47506 \begin_inset Flex URL
47509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47511 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47519 \begin_layout Bibliography
47520 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47521 LatexCommand bibitem
47527 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47529 name "Documentation"
47530 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47534 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47540 \begin_inset Index idx
47543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47545 -packages ! enumitem
47551 \begin_inset Newline newline
47555 \begin_inset Flex URL
47558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47560 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47568 \begin_layout Bibliography
47569 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47570 LatexCommand bibitem
47576 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47578 name "Documentation"
47579 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47583 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47589 \begin_inset Index idx
47592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47594 -packages ! fancyhdr
47600 \begin_inset Newline newline
47604 \begin_inset Flex URL
47607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47609 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47617 \begin_layout Bibliography
47618 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47619 LatexCommand bibitem
47625 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47627 name "Documentation"
47628 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47632 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47638 \begin_inset Index idx
47641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47643 -packages ! hyperref
47649 \begin_inset Newline newline
47653 \begin_inset Flex URL
47656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47658 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47666 \begin_layout Bibliography
47667 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47668 LatexCommand bibitem
47674 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47676 name "Documentation"
47677 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47681 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47687 \begin_inset Index idx
47690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47692 -packages ! nomencl
47698 \begin_inset Newline newline
47702 \begin_inset Flex URL
47705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47707 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47715 \begin_layout Bibliography
47716 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47717 LatexCommand bibitem
47723 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47725 name "Documentation"
47726 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47730 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47736 \begin_inset Index idx
47739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47741 -packages ! prettyref
47747 \begin_inset Newline newline
47751 \begin_inset Flex URL
47754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47756 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47764 \begin_layout Bibliography
47765 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47766 LatexCommand bibitem
47772 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47774 name "Documentation"
47775 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47779 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47785 \begin_inset Index idx
47788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47790 -packages ! refstyle
47796 \begin_inset Newline newline
47800 \begin_inset Flex URL
47803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47805 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47813 \begin_layout Bibliography
47814 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47815 LatexCommand bibitem
47821 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47824 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47828 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47830 \begin_inset Newline newline
47834 \begin_inset Flex URL
47837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47839 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47847 \begin_layout Bibliography
47848 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47849 LatexCommand bibitem
47855 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47858 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47862 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47864 \begin_inset Newline newline
47868 \begin_inset Flex URL
47871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47873 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47881 \begin_layout Bibliography
47882 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47883 LatexCommand bibitem
47889 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47892 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47896 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47897 for Cyrillic languages:
47898 \begin_inset Newline newline
47902 \begin_inset Flex URL
47905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47907 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47915 \begin_layout Bibliography
47916 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47917 LatexCommand bibitem
47923 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47926 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47930 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47932 \begin_inset Newline newline
47936 \begin_inset Flex URL
47939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47941 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47949 \begin_layout Bibliography
47950 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47951 LatexCommand bibitem
47957 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47960 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47964 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47966 \begin_inset Newline newline
47970 \begin_inset Flex URL
47973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47975 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47983 \begin_layout Bibliography
47984 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47985 LatexCommand bibitem
47991 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47994 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47998 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48000 \begin_inset Newline newline
48004 \begin_inset Flex URL
48007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48009 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
48017 \begin_layout Bibliography
48018 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48019 LatexCommand bibitem
48025 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48028 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
48032 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48034 \begin_inset Newline newline
48038 \begin_inset Flex URL
48041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48043 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
48051 \begin_layout Bibliography
48052 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48053 LatexCommand bibitem
48059 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48062 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
48066 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48068 \begin_inset Newline newline
48072 \begin_inset Flex URL
48075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48077 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
48085 \begin_layout Bibliography
48086 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48087 LatexCommand bibitem
48093 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48096 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
48100 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48102 \begin_inset Newline newline
48106 \begin_inset Flex URL
48109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48111 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
48119 \begin_layout Bibliography
48120 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48121 LatexCommand bibitem
48127 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48130 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
48134 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
48136 \begin_inset Newline newline
48140 \begin_inset Flex URL
48143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48145 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
48153 \begin_layout Bibliography
48154 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48155 LatexCommand bibitem
48161 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48164 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
48168 about new features in
48174 \begin_inset Newline newline
48178 \begin_inset Flex URL
48181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48183 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
48191 \begin_layout Standard
48192 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
48199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48226 \begin_inset Note Note
48229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48236 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
48237 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
48238 bibliography is the second one:
48246 \begin_layout Standard
48247 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
48248 LatexCommand bibtex
48249 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
48250 options "biblio/alphadin"
48257 \begin_layout Standard
48258 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48262 \begin_layout Standard
48263 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
48264 LatexCommand printnomenclature
48270 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
48271 LatexCommand printindex